Talkswitch Network Hardware 24 CA User Manual

T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E  
TALKSWITCH 24-CA  
TALKSWITCH 48-CA/CVA  
RELEASE 4.0  
C T.T S 0 0 5 . 0 0 110 2  
F o r u s e i n  
N o r t h A m e r i c a  
®
A N S W E R S W I T H I N T E L L I G E N C E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
X
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I I  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
I I I  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I V  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V I  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREFACE  
WHAT’S IN THIS GUIDE?  
The TalkSwitch User Guide contains all the information you need, whether  
you are installing a single TalkSwitch unit or multiple VoIP enabled units. It  
is intended to be a complete reference accompanying the TalkSwitch Start  
Guide that ships with every TalkSwitch unit.  
This preface contains important information to help you maximize your  
installation effort and to get the most out of the features and the flexibility  
of your TalkSwitch system. We strive to make your experience with  
installation and configuration the most rewarding possible.  
We would ask you to read important information concerning power  
interruptions and safety precautions contained in the appendices in order to  
ensure your TalkSwitch equipment is set up in the safest way possible while  
avoiding equipment damage.  
What you should know  
While TalkSwitch is customer installable, certain skills are required if you  
need to route cables or to configure a network. The following points will help  
you determine the required skills:  
Configuring the TalkSwitch system using the configuration software can  
be performed by anyone with basic computer skills once the system is  
physically installed with proper networking equipment configurations (if  
two or more units are networked on a LAN).  
While most buildings are wired to accommodate TalkSwitch system setup,  
the need to route telephone and/or network cabling can occur  
occasionally. If your organization does not have someone with this skill  
set, we recommend the use of an outside telephony system technician.  
Connecting TalkSwitch to network equipment such as routers, switches or  
hubs with a connection to the Internet, as well as configuring firewalls,  
computers and TalkSwitch for networked use internally and with  
Internet. If your organization does not have someone with this IT skill  
set, we recommend the use of an outside IT technician.  
P R E F A C E  
V I I  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If you are installing a single, non-VoIP, TalkSwitch unit, anyone with basic  
computer skills can use the TalkSwitch Start Guide and this user guide to  
perform a full installation and configuration.  
TalkSwitch system installations can be categorized into some general  
configurations, such as single unit installation, networked units installation,  
VoIP or non-VoIP installation, etc. This section helps you determine your  
best possible plan of action using this guide, according to your installation  
type. While not every possible installation scenario is detailed below,  
determine which one better fits your situation and use its guidelines as a  
solutions for common problems and the index at the back is a means to  
quickly navigate to specific areas.  
Single unit installation  
When installing a single, non-VoIP TalkSwitch unit, you can skip the sections  
marked with the Networked and VoIP icons.  
Networked units installation  
When installing networked TalkSwitch units, you require the sections marked  
with the Networked icon.  
VoIP installation  
When installing a VoIP enabled unit, you require the sections marked with  
the VoIP icon. Chapter 5: VoIP Information on page 155 provides an  
additional resource.  
Connecting devices  
When connecting phones and other devices to your TalkSwitch unit(s),  
information you need.  
V I I I  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
FINDING THE INFORMATION YOU NEED  
The following user guide functionality helps you find the information you  
need quickly and enables you to skip the information you don’t need. This  
will make your experience with this user guide and your TalkSwitch system  
installation and configuration much more efficient.  
Using the table of contents and the index  
The table of contents at the front of this user guide contains all of the  
section headings and page numbers throughout the manual. The index at the  
back of the user guide contains a keyword reference with page numbers. If  
you are using this guide online in PDF format, the headings and keywords  
will contain hyperlinks, allowing you to quickly navigate to the sections you  
need.  
Navigating with cross-references  
Cross-references are contained throughout the user guide in order to help  
you access related information and illustrations quickly. As with the  
headings and keywords located in the table of contents and index, these  
cross-references contain hyperlinks, allowing you to quickly navigate to the  
sections you need.  
Where to go for further information  
The guides listed below and other guides can be found on the TalkSwitch  
software CD, in the TalkSwitch folder in the Windows Start menu once the  
software has been installed, and in the support section of our website at  
www.talkswitch.com/support.  
For basic installation and configuration instructions, refer to the  
TalkSwitch Start Guide that ships with every TalkSwitch unit.  
For information on setting up a TalkSwitch 48-CVA system to use VoIP,  
refer to the TalkSwitch VoIP Network Configuration Guide.  
P R E F A C E  
I X  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GUIDE CONVENTIONS  
The TalkSwitch User Guide uses the following text elements and icons as  
visual aids, making the manual more accessible.  
Text elements  
Italic  
Italicized text highlights configuration software fields  
located on the various software windows, as well as  
references to other sections of this guide or to other  
TalkSwitch documents.  
Bold  
Bolded text highlights configuration software menu  
selections located on the software top menu drop-down  
lists and on the left navigation section. Non-numbered  
paragraph headings are also bolded.  
Italic”  
<Italic>  
Icons  
Italicized text in double quotes highlights TalkSwitch  
system voice prompts you hear from a telephone.  
Italicized text in brackets highlights text you are asked  
to type.  
The Networked icon is used to mark sections with  
information pertaining to a setup where two or more  
TalkSwitch units are networked together on a LAN.  
The VoIP icon is used to mark sections with information  
pertaining to a setup where VoIP is being used.  
The IP extension icon is used to mark sections with  
information pertaining to the set-up and use of IP phones  
as local extensions.  
The Alert icon is used to mark sections that are  
important. They may contain warnings or cautions  
alerting the user to pay special attention.  
X
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C H A P T E R 1  
Chapter 1: TalkSwitch Installation  
TALKSWITCH INSTALLATION  
1.1 TALKSWITCH PACKAGE CONTENTS  
CA/CVA unit packages contain the following items:  
Item  
24-CA 48-CA 48-CVA  
TalkSwitch unit  
1
1
1
1
1
1
AC power adapter  
Warning: never use any power adapter other  
than the one provided.  
USB cable  
1
6 foot Ethernet cable  
1
4
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
6 foot telephone cables  
Software and documentation CD  
Quick Reference Cards  
TalkSwitch Start Guide  
TalkSwitch VoIP Network Configuration Guide  
Warranty card  
2
1
1
1
1
1
If any of these items are missing, please contact your TalkSwitch dealer.  
Warning: If TalkSwitch has been exposed to low temperatures prior to  
installation, wait until the system has reached room temperature before  
connecting the power cord to avoid condensation.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1.2 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS  
PC running Windows XP/2000  
160 MB free hard disk space  
256 MB RAM  
USB port or Serial port (for 24 models)  
Ethernet port (for 48 models)  
Minimum 800 x 600 minimum video resolution  
1.3 UNIT FRONT PANEL  
The front panel consists of a power button and five lights indicating the usage  
of the lines with different states of illumination.  
Figure 1: Front panel lights  
Light  
Line 1/Line 2 on  
flickering  
State  
Description  
Line 1/Line 2 is currently in use.  
Line 1/Line 2 is ringing.  
pulsing slowly Line 1/Line 2 caller is on hold.  
quick pulse  
Line 1/Line 2 is engaged by a device that  
is sharing the line with TalkSwitch.  
Power/Data  
on  
TalkSwitch is powered on.  
flickering  
The PC connected (via Serial or USB) to  
TalkSwitch is either sending or retrieving  
information from TalkSwitch.  
pulsing slowly Global Message Waiting Indicator  
(configurable).  
2
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Line 3/Line 4 on  
Line 3/Line 4 is currently in use.  
pulsing slowly Line 3/Line 4 caller is on hold.  
flickering  
Line 3/Line 4 is ringing.  
quick pulse  
Line 3/Line 4 is engaged by a device that  
is sharing the line with TalkSwitch.  
Line 3 and Line 4 lights apply to TalkSwitch models with four incoming  
lines only. For more details on line light error codes, see 1.12 What the  
1.4 UNIT BACK PANEL  
Figure 2: TalkSwitch 24-CA  
Figure 3: TalkSwitch 48-CA/CVA  
The PF box between E4 and L1/L2 represents power failure support. In the  
event of a power failure or loss of power to TalkSwitch, extension 114 is  
able to receive and make calls on Line 1.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors  
MUSIC  
Purpose  
The music connector is a 1/8" (3.5mm) phono jack used  
as an audio input for the music on hold feature. Mono  
cables are recommended. For more information, see 1.8.3  
PA  
The PA (public address) connector is a 1/8" (3.5mm)  
phono jack used as an audio output for the external  
paging feature. Mono cables are recommended. For more  
LAN  
The LAN connector is an RJ-45 port used for unit  
configuration via the PC, unit LAN networking, and VoIP  
capability. For more information, see 1.7.1 Ethernet  
There are 3 green LEDs on the right of the LAN port. The  
top LED indicates network synchronization (connection),  
the middle LED indicates data Rx (receiving data) and the  
bottom LED indicates data Tx (transmitting data).  
E1-E4  
E5-E8  
The extension connectors are RJ-11 ports used for  
connecting phones and other analog devices. For more  
L1-L2  
L3-L4  
The line connectors are RJ-11 ports used for connecting  
incoming phone lines. For more information, see  
Plug in your RJ-11 telephone lines, beginning with L1. If  
you have two lines out of one phone jack, you will  
require a dual-to-two-single-line adapter or replace the  
two-line cord with two single-line cords. Note that L3  
and L4 do not exist on units with only two incoming line  
connectors.  
Use a surge protector if you live in an area prone to  
lightning strikes.  
USB  
The USB connector is a standard USB port used for  
connecting to a PC for unit configuration. For more  
SERIAL  
The serial connector is a RS-232 port used for  
configuration via the PC. For more information, see  
4
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MEMORY SLOT  
POWER  
The memory card slot is a socket used with TalkSwitch  
memory cards. For more information, see  
The power connector is a receptacle rated at 16 VAC/1.5A  
for connecting the supplied AC adapter input line.  
1.5 INSTALLING THE CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE  
1.5.1 Installing the software for the first time  
If your TalkSwitch is already connected with a USB cable, disconnect the  
unit before you install/upgrade the software. Reconnect the USB cable to  
TalkSwitch after the configuration software is installed.  
1. Turn on your computer and insert the TalkSwitch CD into your CD drive.  
The install program starts automatically.  
2. Click NEXT and follow the instructions.  
If you prefer to use Windows Explorer or if the install process does not  
launch automatically:  
1. Double-click the My Computer icon.  
2. Double-click the CD-ROM/DVD drive.  
3. Double-click the Startscreen.exe icon and follow the instructions. After  
you click the Finish button, you will see the TalkSwitch icon on your  
desktop. This means that you have successfully installed the  
configuration software.  
The latest version of the TalkSwitch software can also be downloaded from  
the TalkSwitch website www.talkswitch.com/support.  
1.5.2 Upgrading the TalkSwitch software and firmware  
We are continually looking for ways to enhance your communications  
capabilities. When new features are added, we provide our users with  
immediate access to an update directly from Window’s Start menu.  
1. Start -> Programs -> TalkSwitch 4.00 -> TalkSwitch Auto Update.  
2. If your configuration software is due for an update, a dialog box informs  
you of the status of your software version. See Figure 3. If you need an  
update, you have the option to download the update. The update file is  
stored in C:\Program Files\TalkSwitch\TalkSwitch Configuration 4.00.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. After the update is downloaded, click Yes in the dialog box to install the  
update. See Figure 3. You can install the update later from the folder  
C:\Program Files\TalkSwitch\TalkSwitch Configuration 4.00.  
The TalkSwitch configuration software must be closed in order to install  
the update.  
Figure 4: Check for updates  
Alternatively, you can check the vesions you are running once the system is  
connected by following the three steps below.  
Step 1 — Check current version  
To identify the appropriate update file, you must determine your TalkSwitch  
software and firmware versions. To find your TalkSwitch software version  
number, click Help -> About TalkSwitch Configuration Utility...  
Figure 5: About TalkSwitch software version  
6
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Write down the software number. Go to the TalkSwitch website at  
www.talkswitch.com/support. The instructions help you select and  
download the appropriate upgrade.  
The instructions on our website take precedence over any instructions in  
this user guide.  
The TalkSwitch firmware version number of each unit is listed in the  
System Information window.  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software if not already open.  
Click About TalkSwitch.  
2. Click View System Information.  
Networked units have to run the same firmware version to operate properly  
on the same LAN. Use this window to confirm that all the units have  
matching firmware versions.  
Figure 6: TalkSwitch firmware version  
Step 2 — Download new software and firmware  
When you double-click on the appropriate version for downloading, a  
dialogue box displays, asks you to enter a file name and select a folder for  
the download. We suggest leaving the file name as it is (e.g. TSC400050.exe)  
and saving it to your PC in C:\Program Files\TalkSwitch\TalkSwitch  
Configuration 4.00. Once the download is complete, begin your upgrade by  
double-clicking on the install file or using the Run option on your Windows  
Start menu. A series of windows will guide you through the installation  
process.  
This process updates your configuration software to a newer version. You  
still need to update the firmware to take advantage of new features. The  
new firmware file is placed in the TalkSwitch directory after running the  
install program.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3 — Updating the firmware  
The last step is to update the firmware. Make sure your TalkSwitch is  
connected to your PC.  
1. Open the configuration software.  
2. File -> Update Firmware.  
The update time varies depending on the connection type, how many files  
are needed and how many units are updated. On average the process takes  
between 1 and 5 minutes. The LED lights on the TalkSwitch front panel show  
diagnostic indicators for the update. See 1.12 What the flashing lights mean  
on page 27. When the update is completed, you are prompted to reboot  
TalkSwitch. In the dialog box, click the Proceed button.  
Should the firmware update fail, please repeat the update process above. If  
the problem persists, contact your reseller or TalkSwitch.  
Most firmware updates do not alter your system configuration. In certain  
circumstances, during a major system update, the configuration file may get  
reset to default values.  
When you configure a unit for the first time and every time you modify the  
configuration, we recommend that you save your configuration file to your  
PC and preferably to removable media (3.5" Floppy, CD-ROM disc or Flash  
stick) as a back-up. This avoids having to reconfigure the entire system in  
case of a hardware failure.  
The LastSavedConfig4.00 in C:\Program Files\TalkSwitch\TalkSwitch  
Configuration\ is accessed when you save and retrieve the configuration  
software. For more information, see 2.1.1.1 File Menu on page 30.  
If you have to replace your computer, please download the latest install  
file from our website and follow steps 2 and 3 above. Run the install  
program. In case of a major system update, copy the back-up of your  
configuration file to C:\Program Files\TalkSwitch\TalkSwitch  
Configuration.  
1.6 INITIAL CONFIGURATION  
Once your software is installed and your TalkSwitch is connected directly to  
a PC or via a switch/hub to the LAN, you can customize the TalkSwitch  
system with the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
8
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you connect TalkSwitch to your phone system, it will do the following:  
An incoming call on any line will ring all analog local extensions.  
A receptionist can manually transfer calls to local extensions or  
voicemail.  
Every local extension will have a voice mailbox.  
Analog extension 114 (E4) will still operate during a power failure.  
Recommendation: To minimize the disruption time of your telephone  
lines during the system setup, we recommend that you configure the  
unit before you connect all your phones and lines to TalkSwitch. For  
1.7 CONNECT TALKSWITCH TO A NETWORK OR A PC  
Connect the AC adapter provided with TalkSwitch from an electrical outlet  
to the TalkSwitch unit. Never use a power adapter other than the one that  
came in the TalkSwitch package.  
To configure the TalkSwitch settings, connect the unit to the PC with the  
configuration software installed.  
There are five connection methods.  
1.7.1 Ethernet connection  
An Ethernet cable is supplied with specific unit  
models. This connection requires a LAN and a PC  
on the same switch. Any PC on the LAN can  
configure the unit.  
Sharing computer data and TalkSwitch voice data, on the same hub can  
cause voice degradation during high traffic periods. For best results,  
place TalkSwitch units on a switch, or on their own hub.  
Figure 7: LAN connection  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Connect TalkSwitch to your hub or switch using the supplied Ethernet  
cable and connect your PC to the hub or switch using another standard  
Ethernet (CAT 5) cable with RJ45 connectors.  
2. If not already turned on, press the Power button on the front of your  
TalkSwitch and turn on your computer.  
3. Double-click the TalkSwitch icon on your desktop to open the  
configuration software. If the software was unable to detect your  
TalkSwitch automatically, a dialog box opens requesting you to select the  
connection type.  
4. Select Ethernet and the adapter you wish to use from the drop-down list  
and click Connect...  
Figure 8: Ethernet connection  
5. Once connection has been established, the TalkSwitch System  
Configuration window opens. See Figure 30 on page 29.  
A PC can connect directly to the TalkSwitch LAN port using a ‘cross-over’  
cable equipped with RJ-45 connectors.  
If you encounter difficulties opening the TalkSwitch configuration  
software, check that all your wires and plugs are securely connected.  
1.7.2 USB Connection  
A USB cable is supplied with specific models. The  
PC and TalkSwitch unit must be in close proximity.  
1. Connect the cable to a USB port on your PC and to the USB port on the  
back of TalkSwitch.  
2. If not already turned on, press the Power button on the front of your  
TalkSwitch and turn on your computer.  
1 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Double-click the TalkSwitch icon on your desktop to open the  
configuration software. The dialog box in Figure 8 is displayed.  
4. Select USB from the drop-down list and click Connect... A progress bar  
indicates that the configuration is being retrieved. When this process is  
completed, the TalkSwitch System Configuration window opens.  
Figure 9: USB connection  
1.7.3 Serial connection  
Serial connectivity is an option if you do not have a  
free USB port. The TalkSwitch package does not  
include a Serial cable. The PC and TalkSwitch unit  
must be in close proximity.  
1. Connect the cable to the Serial port on your PC and to the Serial port on  
the back of TalkSwitch.  
Make sure that no other communication programs are running at the  
same time as the configuration software.  
Examples: Palm Pilot, Hot Sync, TalkWorks, Digital Camera, UPS Tracking  
software, etc. These programs tend to occupy the COM ports, preventing  
other programs from using them.  
Look in your system tray for programs using your  
COM ports. Rolling your mouse cursor over each  
icon will also indicate the name of the associated  
program.  
Hot Sync  
2. Press the Power button on the front of your TalkSwitch and turn on your  
computer.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Double-click the TalkSwitch icon on your desktop to open the  
configuration software. The dialog box below is displayed.  
Figure 10: Serial connection  
4. From the drop-down list in the dialog box, select Serial as the connection  
type.  
5. Select a COM port (COM1 or COM2) from the Serial ports drop-down list  
and click Connect... A progress bar indicates that the configuration is  
being retrieved. When this process is completed, the TalkSwitch System  
Configuration window opens. See Figure 30 on page 29.  
1.7.4 Internet connection  
Select USB from the drop-down list and click Connect... A progress bar  
indicates that the configuration is being retrieved. When this process is  
completed, the TalkSwitch System Configuration window opens.  
Ensure your unit is connected to a LAN with the supplied  
Ethernet (CAT 5) cable. The top LED on the the back panel  
beside the LAN port indicates that a connection has been  
established with a switch or hub. To support remote  
configuration over IP, map the TCP 9393 port from your firewall to  
TalkSwitch. Please refer to the manual for your router/firewall to  
activate port forwarding.  
1. Double-click the TalkSwitch icon on your desktop to open the  
configuration software. The dialog box below is displayed.  
2. From the drop-down list in the dialog box, select Internet as the  
connection type.  
1 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 11: Internet connection  
3. In the Address field of the Internet IP Connection Settings section, enter  
the public IP address or the FQDN of the TalkSwitch location and click  
Connect.... A progress bar indicates that the configuration is being  
retrieved. When this process is completed, the TalkSwitch system  
configuration window opens. See Figure 30 on page 29.  
You have the option to store several locations in the address book.  
Figure 12: Address book  
1. Click the Address Book button.  
a) To add a new address, click New.  
b) Type the name of the location into the Entry Name field.  
c) Type the Internet address of the location into the Internet Address  
field and click OK.  
d) To edit or delete an existing entry, highlight the item you wish to  
edit or delete and click Edit or Delete.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.7.5 File connection  
You can load the latest configuration file saved on a PC to make edits and  
save it again as a file or save it directly to TalkSwitch.  
1. Double-click the TalkSwitch icon on your desktop to open the  
configuration software. The dialog box below displays.  
2. From the drop-down list next to Connection Type, select File.  
Figure 13: File connection  
3. Click the Browse button and select the configuration file you wish to  
open and click Open.  
Figure 14: Open TalkSwitch configuration file  
4. Click Connect....  
5. The TalkSwitch System Configuration window opens.  
When a unit is being configured, it is locked to prevent other computers  
or persons using a phone from configuring changes at the same time. If  
you leave the software open for longer than one hour, the unit unlocks  
itself to allow configuration changes.  
1 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Restore Firmware (button)  
This button is available as an alternate method to update firmware if an  
update attempt has failed. Click the Restore Firmware button, then select  
which firmware file to load onto the unit. The firmware update will then  
begin. Follow the instructions presented at each step. Progress will be  
displayed as the update proceeds.  
If you are downgrading to an earlier firmware version, and have more than  
one networked TalkSwitch unit, you must perform the Restore Firmware one  
unit at a time, with the unit separated from the network during the restore.  
1.8 CONNECTING DEVICES  
Move the unit(s) to a location where it can be attached to incoming  
telephone lines and your telephone devices.  
The computer connection is only needed to change the configuration  
settings. It can remain disconnected at other times.  
Figure 15: An example of residential wiring  
T
alkS  
wit  
ch  
Things to consider when placing your TalkSwitch  
Recommendation: We recommend that you connect surge protectors  
between the TalkSwitch unit(s) and your telephone lines to protect  
against lightning damage.  
Wiring  
Make the most of your phone system with optimal home/office wiring. If  
you need help wiring your house or small office and are not sure where all  
the jacks are or what colors of wires to use, refer to Appendix H: Home/Office  
Location  
Check the location of electrical wall outlets and telephone jacks in the room.  
Place the unit(s) close enough to these items using your AC adapter and  
telephone cords.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1.8.1 Connecting incoming telephone lines  
Advisory: In order to minimize disruption to your business, you may  
want to configure TalkSwitch before connecting it to your telephone  
lines and extension phones.  
1. Choose a convenient wall jack to attach to your TalkSwitch and connect  
your telephone lines.  
2. Connect the TalkSwitch unit to the telephone company’s line sockets  
using the dual-wire telephone cables provided. Take note of which  
telephone line is connected to each line port. This information will be  
used in the configuration section.  
Connect the first incoming phone line to L1.  
Connect the second incoming line to L2.  
If you have a unit with more than two incoming lines, connect your  
RJ-11 telephone lines, beginning with L1. If you have two lines out of  
one phone jack, you will require a dual-to-two-single-line adapter or  
replace the two-line cord with two single-line cords. Note that L3 and L4  
do not exist on units with only two incoming line connectors.  
All incoming calls will be routed to the extension phones by TalkSwitch.  
Call handling includes call forwarding, transferring, voicemail, etc.  
Incoming lines are not directly connected to any of the local extensions.  
The software determines which incoming lines are routed to which local  
extensions.  
1.8.2 Connecting local extension telephones and other devices  
Connect your single-line analog device to one of the unit extension jacks the  
same way you would plug it into a standard telephone wall jack.  
You can connect any regular analog extension telephone set, cordless  
telephone or fax machine to the extension ports, E1-E4 (all unit models) and  
E5-E8 (for unit models with more than four extension jacks).  
1. Plug each internal telephone into extensions beginning with E1.  
Connect a phone to E4 to ensure communication during a power failure.  
2. If required, plug the fax line into E3 or E8.  
1 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1.8.2.1 Connecting a regular single-line telephone  
This is the basic, simple set-up. All functionality including transferring calls,  
forwarding calls and voicemail, is handled by the unit. Even the most basic  
of phones, once connected, will inherit these functions.  
Figure 16: Single-line telephone  
Each phone is connected to a single  
extension. A call transferred to  
TalkSwitch Jacks  
extension 111 will ring the phone  
E1 E2 E3 E4  
Incoming Phone Lines  
connected on jack E1. A call  
transferred to extension 112 will ring  
the phone on jack E2 and so on.  
113  
114  
Extensions 111  
112  
1.8.2.2 Connecting a regular dual-line telephone  
Most dual-line phones have separate plug-ins for two incoming telephone  
lines (Line 1 and Line 2). If your dual-line telephone does not have separate  
plug-ins, you can use a Line 1/Line 2 splitter to separate the two lines as  
shown in Figures 17 and 18.  
You can plug the dual-line phone into the TalkSwitch unit using one or two  
extension jacks. Figure 17 below shows a dual-line phone using one jack.  
Figure 18 on page 17 shows a dual-line telephone plugged into the unit  
using two jacks.  
Figure 17: Dual-line telephone on one jack  
TalkSwitch extension 111 is connected  
to a dual-line phone using one  
TalkSwitch Jacks  
E1 E2 E3 E4  
Incoming Phone Lines  
extension jack. Calls on extension 111  
show Line 1 as active.  
Line Splitter  
Extension 111  
Figure 18: Dual-line telephone on two jacks  
TalkSwitch extensions 111 and 112 are  
connected to a dual-line phone using  
TalkSwitch Jacks  
E1 E2 E3 E4  
Incoming Phone Lines  
two extension jacks. Calls on extension  
111 show Line 1 as active. Calls on  
extension 112 show Line 2 as active.  
Extensions 111 and 112  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Figure 19: Dual-line telephone on splitter  
TalkSwitch extensions 111 and 112 are  
connected to a dual-line phone using a  
line splitter. Calls on extension 111  
show Line 1 as active. Calls on  
TalkSwitch Jacks  
E1 E2 E3 E4  
Incoming Phone Lines  
Line Splitter  
extension 112 show Line 2 as active.  
Extensions 111 and 112  
1.8.2.3 Connecting regular multi-line phones  
Figure 20: Four-line telephone  
Jacks 111, 112, 113 and 114 are all  
TalkSwitch Jacks  
E1 E2 E3 E4  
wired to the four-line phone. When a  
call is transferred to extension 111,  
Line 1 on the phone shows as active.  
Calls on extension 112 show Line 2 as  
active and so on. You may configure  
each incoming line to ring any given  
number of extensions. Configure  
Incoming Phone Lines  
Line Splitter  
Line Splitter  
4-Line Phone  
Extensions 111, 112, 113 114  
&
incoming Line 1 to ring extension 111,  
Line 2 to ring extension 112, etc.  
1.8.2.4 Connecting an IP phone  
Plug the IP phone into your switch/hub using the supplied RJ-45 cable.  
Please refer to the IP Phone Configuration Guide in the TalkSwitch  
documentation folder. If you are using a third-party IP phone, refer to the  
user guide of the third-party IP phone for configuration instructions.  
1.8.2.5 Attach an internal or an external modem  
Plug the modem’s telephone cable into a unit extension jack. Your modem is  
now an extension that can access all lines and take advantage of call routing  
features.  
Modems connected to a unit operate at a maximum of 28 kbps.  
If you don’t want to change your dial-up settings for the modem, enable  
Direct Line Access for the extension associated to the modem. For more  
1 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1.8.2.6 Connecting fax machines  
If you are connecting a fax machine to a unit with two or four incoming  
lines, plug it into local extension E3 or E8.  
TalkSwitch provides you with three options to configure your fax machine.  
Choose the best option for your office.  
Option 1 — Dedicated Fax Line  
You may already have an incoming dedicated fax line. You can leave this  
line directly connected to your fax machine. Connect the remaining  
incoming phone lines to your unit. Incoming phone lines will be handled by  
the unit and your fax will work the way it has always worked.  
Figure 21: Dedicated fax line  
After installing TalkSwitch, the fax machine remains on its own dedicated line.  
All incoming telephone lines are shared by the remaining office phones.  
Advantages: It’s easy to set up and you don’t need to change the way your  
fax handles calls.  
Disadvantages: The dedicated fax line cannot be shared with the other  
phone devices (i.e. you cannot make an outbound voice call on your fax  
line). The dedicated fax line costs money, and may not be used as frequently  
as it could be.  
Option 2 — Distinctive Ring  
Distinctive ring is a service provided by your phone company. A second  
phone number is added to a phone line. A call to either phone number will  
ring the same line with different ring patterns. You can use one ring pattern  
to indicate a fax.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Here’s how the TalkSwitch handles incoming calls:  
Figure 22: Distinctive ring  
After installing TalkSwitch, it automatically detects the distinctive ring pattern.  
Faxes are automatically routed to the fax machine and calls to the phones.  
Distinctive  
RIng 1  
Distinctive  
RIng 2  
Advantages: This option does not require a second physical line for faxes.  
More telephone lines can be added as you grow. You can keep the same fax  
arrangement.  
Disadvantages: Your phone company may charge a fee for the distinctive  
ring. If you choose this option, you will require the distinctive ring service  
from your telephone company.  
Option 3 — Automatic fax detection via the auto attendant  
The auto attendant can detect incoming fax calls and route them  
accordingly. To enable this, an auto attendant must answer all incoming  
calls with your pre-recorded message. It will listen for a fax tone to  
determine if the call is an incoming fax. If so, the call is routed to the fax  
machine, otherwise the call follows your Call Handling settings. You must  
create an auto attendant to use this method.  
Figure 23: Automatic fax detection via auto attendant  
All incoming calls are answered by the Auto Attendant.  
The Auto Attendant then directs the call to the fax or local phone extensions.  
Distinctive  
RIng 1  
Distinctive  
RIng 2  
Advantages: Calls are automatically handled for you. No distinctive ring  
service and no listening to ring patterns is required. Incoming phone lines  
are shared between all phones and faxes, making better use of your  
resources.  
Disadvantages: Some older fax machines do not emit a fax (CNG) tone.  
Therefore, the auto attendant cannot detect incoming faxes from those  
devices.  
2 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your auto attendant volume is set too high or if your telephone lines  
are noisy, the auto attendant may have difficulty detecting the incoming  
fax tone and therefore not route the call to the fax machine. You can  
solve this problem by adjusting the volume. For more information, see  
Options 2 and 3 require settings to be programmed into the unit using the  
configuration software. For more information, see 2.2.6 Fax information on  
1.8.3 Connecting devices to the music jack  
The music jack is designed to support audio sources like a CD player, audio,  
tape player or other sound devices for playing music or messages to callers  
while they are on hold. Connect the audio source via its headphone output  
to the music jack.  
The music jack requires a 1/8" (3.5 mm) mono phono connector. If you have  
more than one unit connected to a LAN, load a .wav file onto each unit to  
eliminate the need for a separate music source for  
each unit.  
1.8.4 Connecting to the PA (public address) jack  
The PA jack can be connected to a PA system for external paging or to an  
amplification system to screen voicemail or to use as a line simulator. The  
PA jack requires a 1/8" (3.5 mm) mono phono connector. If you have more  
than one unit connected to a LAN, you need to provide a connection onto  
the system to the PA system.  
1.9 NETWORKING TALKSWITCH UNITS ON A LAN  
Up to four 48-CA and/or 48-CVAunits can be networked together over a LAN  
to increase the number of lines and extensions in your phone system.  
1.9.1 Connecting TalkSwitch units to a LAN  
You can plug your unit(s) into your existing LAN or operate it on its own  
LAN with an Ethernet switch. Ensure that the firmware on all units is  
updated before adding them to the LAN.  
Check www.talkswitch.com/support/ for the latest updates.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
TalkSwitch unit enclosures are not designed for stacking. We recommend  
wall-mounting units to maximize airflow and keep the units from  
overheating.  
1.9.1.1 Ethernet switch  
A switch provides direct communication between units, thus keeping the  
voice-over-LAN data isolated from other data on the network.  
1. Connect up to four 48-CA and/or 48-CVA units to the LAN switch.  
2. Connect a computer to the phone system using the LAN connection or  
directly to the unit through the USB or Serial port.  
3. Power up and configure your units before adding any IP phones that will  
be part of the system. It is important that you place the IP phones on the  
same subnet as TalkSwitch.  
Example: If your TalkSwitch unit has the IP address 192.168.1.200, your IP  
phone should use IP addresses in the range 192.168.1.xxx that do not  
conflict with other IP addresses.  
Figure 24: Three units connected via a switch  
LAN  
E5  
E1  
E6  
E2  
E7  
E3  
E8  
E4  
L3/L4  
L1/L2  
L4  
L2  
LAN  
E5  
E1  
E6  
E2  
E7  
E3  
E8  
E4  
L3/L4  
L1/L2  
L4  
L2  
PF  
PF  
MUSIC PA  
USB  
SERIAL  
POWER  
MUSIC PA  
USB  
SERIAL  
POWER  
LAN  
E5  
E1  
E6  
E2  
E7  
E3  
E8  
E4  
L3/L4  
L1/L2  
L4  
L2  
PF  
MUSIC PA  
USB  
SERIAL  
POWER  
POWER  
Internet  
1
2
3
4
Reset  
1.9.2 Power up all the TalkSwitch units  
Connect the provided AC adapters to each unit and plug the adapters into  
available power outlets. Turn the units on by pressing the Power button on  
the front of each unit. The lights on the front panels of the units will flash.  
This means that they are powered up and connected to the LAN, but their ID  
numbers are not set.  
2 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1.9.3 Setting or changing the unit ID  
Units are shipped from the manufacturer with unit ID 1. If two or more units  
are placed on the same LAN with the same unit ID number, it causes a  
conflict. All the line lights on the front panel of the units are flashing. You  
have to assign a different unit ID to each of the units.  
To change the unit ID, the configuration software must be closed!  
1. Pick up a telephone handset connected to one of the extension jacks on  
#
the unit and press  
to enter command mode.  
2. Enter a password if prompted.  
3. Now, you have the following options:  
Keys  
Result  
#
Responds with the unit ID number of that particular unit.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
#
#
#
#
Sets the unit ID to 1.  
Sets the unit ID to 2.  
Sets the unit ID to 3.  
Sets the unit ID to 4.  
The system indicates that the update was successful and the front panel  
lights stop flashing after a few seconds. When the front panel Data light is  
on solid, the units are ready for network use.  
No IP information is required to configure TalkSwitch since it does not  
use the TCP/IP protocol for voice traffic over the LAN. IP configuration is  
required for remote management, voicemail to e-mail notification or for  
VoIP.  
1.9.4 How unit IDs affect system extension numbers  
After successfully changing each unit ID to a unique number, it can be  
identified by the network. More importantly, each local extension, remote  
extension, and voice mailbox has a unique numbering system. The second  
digit in the three digit identifier is the unit ID number, up to unit 4. See the  
following diagram and table.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Figure 25: Examples of three-digit identifiers  
Unit ID 1  
Unit ID 2  
Unit ID 3  
Unit ID 4  
Local analog 111–118  
or IP  
121–128  
131–138  
141–148  
extensions  
Remote  
e x t e n s i o n s  
210-219  
111-118  
210-219  
410-419  
220-229  
121-128  
220-229  
420-429  
230-239  
131-138  
230-239  
430-439  
240-249  
141-148  
240-249  
440-449  
Local  
m a i l b o x e s  
Remote  
m a i l b o x e s  
General  
m a i l b o x e s  
1.9.5 Keep track of the lines and extensions  
To keep track of the extensions and the lines connected to each unit, label  
each unit with its unit ID. It simplifies matters when you need to add or  
remove extensions and lines.  
If the units are located in a room away from the extensions and you need to  
identify the units, the View System Information utility in the configuration  
software allows you to identify each unit as follows:  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Click the View System Information link below the TalkSwitch image. See  
Figure 26.  
3. Select the Unit ID to verify.  
4. Click the Identify button and observe the flashing LEDs. The lights stop  
flashing when you click the Close button or when 5 minutes have  
elapsed.  
2 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Figure 26: System Information window  
1.9.6 Optimizing the system for networked use  
TalkSwitch units have been designed to operate optimally when in a  
networked state. Below are a few items that have been designed for better  
network use.  
Configuration settings  
All units are cloned with identical settings. If a unit has disappeared off the  
network (adapter unplugged, LAN disconnected, LAN failure, etc.), the  
system can still handle the calls since it retains the configuration settings of  
the missing unit. If an extension or a voice mailbox cannot be reached, the  
caller hears a system prompt: “The extension you are trying to reach is  
currently unavailable, please try again later.”  
Outgoing line hunt groups  
When two or more units are on a LAN, the system tries placing calls out on  
the same unit the call originates from. This avoids using a line across the  
LAN on another unit, which helps to minimize the LAN traffic and optimizes  
the opportunity for all inbound calls to connect across the LAN if required.  
Auto attendants  
There are a total of nine auto attendants that are shared by all units on the  
LAN. When an auto attendant is recorded on any unit, it is automatically  
copied to all other units on the LAN. This design minimizes LAN traffic and  
provides functionality back-up in case a unit or units have disappeared off  
the network (adapter unplugged, LAN disconnected, LAN failure, etc.). In  
this event, all units can still answer inbound calls with the same auto  
attendant messages.  
Voicemail  
All local extension and remote extension voicemail data is stored on the  
unit where the extensions normally reside. For example, all greetings,  
directory names and voicemail messages for extensions 121-128, 220-229  
and mailboxes 420-429 are stored on the unit with unit ID 2. If a unit is  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
completely filled with voicemail messages, new messages will not be stored  
on other units. The system cannot accept anymore messages for mailboxes  
belonging to that unit. If you need more memory, TalkSwitch memory cards  
can be purchased from your reseller. To view the memory usage of each  
TalkSwitch unit and each mailbox, click Tools -> Memory Usage ->  
Voicemail or click Tools -> Voicemail Manager.  
1.10 INSTALLING A MEMORY CARD  
TalkSwitch memory cards are specifically formatted for use with TalkSwitch  
units. They allow you to add additional voicemail message capacity to your  
unit. Voicemail memory is used to store messages left in voice mailboxes. It  
is also used to store auto attendant greetings and announcements.  
TalkSwitch comes with 30 minutes built-in memory.  
Figure 27: Memory card  
Memory can be increased  
in increments of 1 hour,  
2 hours, 4.5 hours and 9 hours.  
1. Insert the memory card into the memory slot with the gold contact face  
down and the This side up tab showing. You don’t have to turn the unit  
off or disconnect any of the telephones.  
Figure 28: Memory card slot  
2 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.11 UPGRADING TALKSWITCH UNITS  
As your business grows, your TalkSwitch unit(s) may need upgrading. You  
have the option of upgrading your 24-CA unit to a 48-CA unit and your  
48-CA unit to a VoIP model (48-CVA).  
Figure 29: Top board and VoIP module upgrades for 24-CA to 48-CA  
For customers upgrading the 24-CA unit to a  
48-CA unit, we provide an upgrade kit. This  
kit consists of a top board that you add to  
your existing 24-CA unit, as well as a guide  
containing detailed, step-by-step  
instructions for the upgrade procedure.  
For customers upgrading a 48-CA unit to a  
48-CVA unit we provide a VoIP module that  
they can add to their existing TalkSwitch  
48-CA. We supply detailed, step-by-step  
instructions on how to install the VoIP  
module.  
Customers upgrading the TalkSwitch 24-CA to a TalkSwitch 48-CA and then  
upgrading to a TalkSwitch 48-CVA need a TalkSwitch top board and a VoIP  
module. You can purchase upgrade boards and VoIP modules at your reseller.  
1.12 WHAT THE FLASHING LIGHTS MEAN  
Diagnostics for the lights flashing on the unit front panel  
All line lights flashing simultaneously:  
The unit ID of this unit is in conflict with another unit on the same LAN.  
Make sure you assign a different unit ID to each unit. For more information,  
Line 2 and 3 lights flashing simultaneously:  
This indicates a file system error. Terminate calls in progress. Reboot the  
unit. Tools -> Reboot TalkSwitch or, on the front panel, turn the power  
button off and back on. It will do a file system check and fix any problems.  
Line 1 and 4 lights flashing simultaneously:  
This indicates a voice mailbox error. Terminate calls in progress. Reboot  
TalkSwitch. Tools -> Reboot TalkSwitch or, on the front panel, turn the  
power button off and back on. It will do a file system check and fix any  
problems.  
T A L K S W I T C H I N S T A L L A T I O N  
2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Line 1, 2, 3 and 4 lights flashing simultaneously:  
The firmware needs to be updated or reloaded. Ensure that you update with  
the last version, do not use the version on the installation CD. There might  
be a newer version. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
File -> Update Firmware...  
Line 1 and 4, then Line 2 and 3, lights flashing alternatively:  
The system prompts are not loaded or corrupted. Reload the firmware. Open  
the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
File -> Update Firmware...  
Line 1 and 3 lights, then Line 2 and 4 lights flashing repeatedly:  
This is usually the case after a firmware update. Reboot TalkSwitch.  
Tools -> Reboot TalkSwitch or, on the front panel, turn the power button  
off and back on.  
1.13 VERIFYING THE CONNECTIONS  
If you are having problems, they could be due to loose cables. Check the  
following:  
1. Are your telephone cables connected to a wall jack at one end and the  
unit at the other? Ensure the devices you are using as extensions  
(phones, faxes, etc.) are plugged into the extension jacks located on the  
back panel of the unit. Do not plug your extensions directly into a wall  
jack unless that jack is wired to a unit extension jack.  
2. Check the Serial, USB or LAN connection between TalkSwitch and  
your PC.  
3. Ensure that the unit AC adapter is plugged into a working power outlet  
and that the unit is turned on. Make sure that you are using the  
AC adapter supplied with your unit. This adapter cannot be substituted  
with any other adapter. If your adapter appears to be defective, please  
contact your TalkSwitch dealer to order the proper replacement.  
4. If networked, ensure that you have the latest firmware loaded on all  
units. To check the firmware version, open the configuration software,  
and click the link View System Information. All units listed in the System  
Information dialog box should have the same firmware version.  
2 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R 2  
CHAPTER 2: TALKSWITCH CONFIGURATION  
TALKSWITCH CONFIGURATION  
2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
This chapter contains detailed information about all the features in the  
TalkSwitch configuration software with step-by-step instructions on how to  
customize these features to best suit your needs.  
2.1.1 The configuration screen  
The configuration screen consists of the following parts:  
Figure 30: Initial configuration screen  
X
Z
Y
[
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The numbers in Figure 30 are explained below.  
1. Menu items.  
2. Configuration navigation controlling the display in the configuration  
window.  
3. Configuration window displaying configuration information.  
4. View System Information is a link to the MAC address, IP address,  
hardware and firmware version of the unit.  
Context-sensitive help information is available for each option in the  
configuration software. Rest your mouse cursor over any of the controls  
and the information related to that control displays in a pop-up.  
2.1.1.1 File Menu  
Open...  
Opens the existing configuration files from the PC. TalkSwitch  
backs up the configuration to a file called Configuration every  
time you save the settings.  
Save to  
Saves the current configuration to the TalkSwitch unit.  
TalkSwitch  
Save to File... Saves the current configuration to a file on your PC.  
Exit  
Closes the configuration software.  
Retrieve  
Settings  
Retrieves the settings from the unit connected to the PC.  
Update  
Updates the firmware. For more information,  
page 5.  
2.1.1.2 View Menu  
Toolbar  
Toggles the toolbar on/off  
Status Bar  
Toggles the status bar on/off  
3 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2.1.1.3 Tools Menu  
Voicemail: Displays a dialog box showing internal memory  
Memory  
Usage  
usage for voicemail messages.  
Auto Attendant: Displays a dialog box showing internal  
memory usage for auto attendant messages.  
Voicemail  
Manager  
Displays a dialog box with options to check the voice mailbox  
data, delete a mailbox password and reset mailboxes to  
factory default.  
Terminal  
Window  
Displays a command line interface. This option is useful for  
troubleshooting in conjunction with technical support.  
Real-time to Serial Port: TalkSwitch can output call detail  
records to a PC connected to a Serial port.  
Call Logging  
Output  
Store to file on TalkSwitch: TalkSwitch can store call detail  
records to a file stored on TalkSwitch. This file can be  
retrieved/viewed from a web browser.  
Defaults...  
Resets the current page or the entire configuration to  
defaults.  
Reboot  
TalkSwitch  
Prompts you to save the configuration and provides options  
when to reboot.  
View Keys  
Installed  
Lists your registration key(s) with the expiry date(s).  
Check for  
updates  
Checks the web site for configuration software updates.  
2.1.1.4 Help Menu  
About  
Displays the TalkSwitch software version number, firmware  
version and copyright information.  
TalkSwitch  
Configuration  
Utility...  
User Guides... Opens the folder containing the TalkSwitch documentation.  
Support on  
the Web...  
Launches your browser and links you to our support site.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2.1.1.5 Configuration navigation  
The configuration navigation organizes all the configuration topics within  
folders. The following is a brief description of each folder seen in the  
navigation section to the left of the window. See Figure 2.1.2 on page 33.  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Click the  
sign beside each folder to expand it and display configuation  
option sub-categories. When you configure TalkSwitch or when you wish  
to modify the setup, it is helpful to be familiar with this structure.  
About  
TalkSwitch  
This link displays version information about the TalkSwitch  
software. It also displays new voicemail messages, the time  
and date and the current mode of operation.  
System  
Configure the system setup. From here you can activate lines  
Information and extensions.  
Voicemail Configure voice mailboxes and global settings for the  
voicemail system.  
Call Handling Configure how to handle incoming calls. It includes auto  
attendant and individual call handling setups for all phone  
numbers, extensions and modes of operation.  
Call Back/  
Call Bridge  
Configure the TalkSwitch call back/call bridge features in this  
folder. Both of these features reduce your company’s  
long- distance expenses.  
Options  
Configure audio controls, troubleshooting and various  
operation settings in this folder.  
3 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 31: Configuration navigation  
2.1.2 Special considerations when connecting multiple units to a LAN  
Multiple units on a LAN will function as a single phone system. Some  
features are expanded as you add units (e.g. number of voice mailboxes),  
others are global in nature and are not expanded when you add more units  
(e.g. park orbits).  
To determine the number of local extensions and mailboxes your TalkSwitch  
system supports, add the extension jacks (E1–E8) on all the units. In  
addition, each unit supports ten remote extensions and mailboxes.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Example: If you have two 48-CA units connected on the same LAN, the  
system can support 8 PSTN lines, 16 local extensions and 20 remote  
extensions.Each unit is identified with a tab at the top of the configuration  
window, System Information -> Telephone Lines to allow you to select  
the unit in the group.  
Figure 32: Unit tabs  
The features described below are not affected by the number of units on  
the LAN.  
Feature  
Description  
Auto Attendant  
There are 9 auto attendants shared by all units on  
the LAN. This means that all inbound calls can be  
attendant on page 80) answered by the same auto attendant on an  
incoming line. When a new auto attendant is  
recorded on a unit, it is automatically copied onto  
all the other units.  
Music on Hold  
There are two ways to add music on hold to your  
system:  
through an external audio source  
by loading an internal music file  
Call Back  
There are 4 auto call back accounts per unit. To use  
(See 2.5 Call Back/Call an announced message for a particular auto call  
back account, you need to record the announced  
message on the same unit as the account. This  
means calling in on a line that is physically  
connected to the unit with the account, or using an  
extension connected to the unit.  
Ring Groups  
There are 10 global ring groups (300-309) regardless  
(See 2.2.9 Extension ring of the number of units on a LAN. Each group is  
capable of ringing any extensions on the network.  
A combination of 32 analog and IP extensions can  
be part of a ring group.  
Park Orbits  
There are 10 global park orbits (500-509). Any  
person can put a caller on hold in a temporary park  
orbit so that the call can be retrieved from any  
extension in the office.  
3 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Public Address (PA)  
Each unit has a PA output for connection to a  
public address system. The PA output for a  
TalkSwitch unit is only accessible from extensions  
connected to that unit. To connect all outputs to a  
single amplifier, you will require an adapter.  
2.2 SYSTEM INFORMATION  
Some of the configuration screens that follow may vary depending on  
whether the unit is networked or not. In most cases, the 48-CA/CVA  
screen is shown unless the caption indicates a 24-CA screen. The 24-CA  
models do not have IP Configuration and VoIP Configuration in the  
System Information folder.  
2.2.1 Administration  
For security reasons, we recommend that you use password protection at the  
administrator level. The password is entered at configuration start-up and  
when you access the configuration through an extension phone.  
To activate the use of a system password:  
1. Click the  
next to System Information -> Administration.  
Figure 33: Username and password  
2. If you have units in different locations, we recommend that you assign a  
system name to each unit for tracking purposes. Enter a name in the  
System Name field. The system name will also be required when you are  
logging in through the web interface of the unit for status or Call Detail  
Record (CDR) information. For more information, see  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Enter a system password in the System Password field. It has to be a  
4- to 8-character numeric password, so that you can also enter it on a  
touchtone phone.  
Figure 34: Username and password for a VoIP enabled unit  
Caution: If you leave the password field blank and you are connected to  
the Internet using TCP port 9393 mapped to the unit, the system will be  
vulnerable to configuration changes by anyone on the Internet!  
To enter a new password:  
1. Click in the System Password field.  
2. Type a password and click OK.  
To change the password:  
1. Click in the System Password field.  
2. Type a new password and click OK.  
To delete a password:  
1. Click in the System Password field.  
2. Do not enter anything and click OK.  
3 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 35: Password dialog box  
.
3. After entering, changing or deleting a password,  
click File -> Save settings to TalkSwitch or click the middle icon in the  
tool bar to save the settings.  
Figure 36: Save settings  
New settings must be saved to the  
TalkSwitch phone system to take effect.  
A progress bar will show the data  
exchange to the TalkSwitch unit.  
It takes only a few seconds to  
complete.  
2.2.2 IP Configuration  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA requires an IP address to function properly. If you have a  
TalkSwitch 48-CA, an IP address is required if you want to configure the  
system remotely or if you want to network it with a CVA on a LAN. There are  
two methods of configuring the IP settings, automatic and manual. The  
automatic setting is the default. See Figure 37..System IP Settings section  
The Obtain IP and DNS information automatically radio option is selected by  
default. This selection refers to DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration  
Protocol). If you are on a DHCP server, the IP and DNS information will be  
filled in automatically.  
1. Click the  
next to System Information -> IP Configuration.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Figure 37: Automatic IP configuration  
Additional VoIP configuration information is contained throughout this  
guide. For more information, see 5.4 VoIP Configuration on page 162.  
2. To configure the IP information manually, select Use the following IP and  
DNS information.  
Figure 38: Manual IP configuration  
If you do not have a DHCP server, the following fields need to be completed  
if you plan on using the VoIP capabilities of TalkSwitch 48-CVA.  
3 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit IP Address:  
Assign an available static IP address to each unit (1-4). If you use a DHCP  
server, you have to reserve an IP address for each unit. To reserve an IP  
address, you need the MAC address of each unit. To view the unit MAC  
address, click the View System Information link on the About TalkSwitch  
configuration page. For more information, see 2.1.1 The configuration  
Subnet Mask:  
Enter the subnet mask for the LAN. This address determines what subnet  
the specific addresses belong to.  
Default Gateway:  
Enter the IP address of the gateway on your network. A gateway is a  
hardware device (i. e. router/NAT) that connects the office network to  
the Internet. The gateway allows you to share a DSL, cable modem or  
other Internet connections with all of the computers and IP devices in  
your office network.  
Preferred DNS Server:  
Enter the IP address of the preferred/primary DNS server. DNS is a service  
that is used to resolve a domain name to an IP address.  
Example: A DNS server is used by your web browser to resolve  
www.talkswitch.com to an IP address such as 64.26.166.52. For more  
Alternate DNS Server:  
Enter the alternate/secondary DNS servers IP address if applicable.  
Public WAN IP Address  
Type of public WAN IP address for Internet Connection:  
This field is set to dynamic by default. The unit checks the public IP address  
every 5 minutes. If it changes, it automatically updates to the correct  
information in order to manage VoIP calls properly.  
The dynamic setting will not work in closed network environments. In a  
closed network environment, change the field to static and enter the  
appropriate IP address. If the unit is not behind a router, enter the IP address  
of the unit acting as the local proxy.  
Current public WAN IP address:  
For the dynamic setting, this entry shows the current public IP address and  
is not editable. For the static setting, enter the IP address or the FQDN of  
your location.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Public WAN IP address-checker server name:  
For the public IP address type dynamic, this entry shows the current server  
name for the IP checker utility. If the public IP address type is static, no  
information is required.  
The default location is checkip.talkswitch.com. An IP checker application is  
running on the server that responds to requests from units for the public IP  
address at its location.  
Fully Qualified Domain Name:  
A Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) is required if this location acts as the  
SIP server and does not have a static public IP address from your service  
provider. You can obtain FQDNs for free at www.dyndns.org. If your router  
supports DDNS, program the required information to update the DNS servers.  
If not, download one of the applications specified on the site. It needs to  
run on a PC connected to the same LAN to update the DNS servers. If the  
unit is enabled as a SIP server and no FQDN was entered, the prompt below  
displays.  
Figure 39: Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)  
2.2.3 Telephone Lines  
This section tells TalkSwitch about the telephone lines plugged into its back  
panel. Select a line and fill in the information. For each line there is a status  
message: Line Detected, indicating that TalkSwitch detected a line plugged  
into the associated line port. If a line is plugged into a line port and is not  
detected, check your telephone line connection.  
1. Open the configuration software, if not already open.  
2. Click System Information -> Telephone Lines.  
4 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 40: Telephone lines  
In the Phone numbers section  
Enter the main telephone number for the line connected to TalkSwitch.  
Enable the Distinctive Ring 1 and/or Distinctive Ring 2 if you have this  
service on the current line and wish to have incoming calls handled  
differently on the basis of the distinctive ring. If you want distinctive ring  
numbers handled the same way as your Main number, do not place a  
checkmark in the box.  
If you checked the box, enter the distinctive ring telephone number for  
each of the distinctive ring numbers associated with this line.  
Distinctive Ring 1 corresponds to any double ring pattern.  
Distinctive Ring 2 corresponds to any triple ring pattern.  
3. Click the Activate line checkbox to enable the telephone line port.  
4. Enter the normal telephone number for the telephone line as the  
Main number.  
In the Telephone Company Services section  
Check the boxes that correspond to telephone company services that are on  
this line. Descriptions of these services and how your unit deals with them  
are provided below. For more information, see Appendix B: TalkSwitch and  
3-Way Calling/Conference  
TalkSwitch can work with a service to forward calls to remote extensions or  
other external phone numbers while using same line connect. You can use  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
this service as an option for bridging calls to external numbers when you  
call into a unit from outside. If you are having difficulties with line volume  
levels when you forward calls to remote extensions or when you are using  
call bridge, forward calls using 3-way calling.  
Transfer and Clear (Centrex/Plexar transfer)  
TalkSwitch can clear the line after forwarding a call to a remote extension, if  
your telephone line supports this feature. If you enable this feature without  
having the service, callers are disconnected when a unit attempts to forward  
their call to the remote extension.  
Call Waiting  
Check this box if you have a call waiting service on the current line. Note  
that you should remove this service from your line, since there is no way for  
the unit to answer a second call on the same line while it is handling the  
first call. You may want to consider adding the hunt/rollover service to your  
lines instead.  
Caller ID  
Check this box if the current line provides Caller ID information. The unit  
passes the Caller ID information along to the selected extension. Also,  
TalkSwitch can use the time information provided by Caller ID to update the  
TalkSwitch clock.  
Telephone Company Voicemail  
Check this box if you are subscribed to a telephone company voicemail  
service.  
Hunt/Rollover/Busy Forwarding  
Check this box if the current line is associated with a line hunt or Line  
Rollover service from the telephone company. Any lines that belong to a  
hunt/rollover group should be configured to handle calls the same way.  
Calibrate Lines (button):  
Click this button whenever a line is added or changed. Calibrate Lines allows  
TalkSwitch to optimize lines for call bridge and call forwarding. Only lines  
that are detected get calibrated.  
For information about configuring the VoIP numbers, see  
2.2.4 Line hunt groups  
There are a total of 9 line hunt groups that control outbound call line  
selections. These line hunt groups are used by local and remote extensions,  
4 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
and by call bridge. Each hunt group can support several line choices and  
attempt to use an available line in the order that they are listed for that  
hunt group. These settings have no effect on incoming calls.  
Default setup:  
Hunt Group 9:  
Hunt Group 81:  
Hunt Group 82:  
Hunt Group 83:  
Hunt Group 84:  
Hunt Group 88:  
selects any available telephone line.  
selects telephone Line 1.  
selects telephone Line 2.  
selects telephone Line 3 (only four-line models).  
selects telephone Line 4 (only four-line models).  
selects any available VoIP number (only applies  
when a VoIP unit is present on the LAN).  
1. Select System Information -> Line Hunt Groups.  
2. Select a Line Hunt Group and enter a unique Line Hunt Group name to  
identify this group elsewhere in the configuration software.  
3. Under Set Line Hunt Group, select the Line Type. If you wish to use this  
hunt group to access telephone lines, select Phone Lines. To use this hunt  
group to access VoIP numbers, select VoIP numbers.  
4. Click the checkbox(es) next to the line(s) you wish to add to the hunt  
group.  
Figure 41: Hunt group configuration  
If multiple units are connected to the LAN, outbound calls always hunt  
the lines on the unit where the extension is connected. This minimizes  
network traffic between units.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 42: Hunt lines on same unit first  
2.2.5 Automatic Route Selection and Toll Restriction  
What is Automatic Route Selection (ARS)?  
ARS allows you to automatically direct outgoing calls to selected lines. With  
ARS, you can ensure that your outgoing long-distance calls use the line with  
the lowest-cost long-distance plan or that your inter-branch calls always use  
your VoIP trunks.  
What is Toll Restriction?  
Toll restriction blocks calls to specific destinations. With toll restriction, you  
can prevent extensions in your system from placing unauthorized long-  
distance calls.  
Example: You have a low-cost long-distance plan. You assign one telephone  
line to handle all local calls and another line for long-distance calls within  
North America to go through your long-distance plan. At the same time, you  
can block unauthorized long-distance calls from going overseas.  
TalkSwitch uses the first several digits (referred to as ‘leading digits’) of a  
phone number to automatically select the specific phone line that you have  
chosen to make that type of call. ARS and toll restriction use line hunt  
groups, which have to be configured to provide access to telephone lines or  
VoIP trunks.  
Planning Automatic Route Selection and Toll Restriction  
Identify the leading digits of the numbers for the calls to be routed or  
blocked.  
Identify the carrier codes.  
4 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Identify which telephone lines and VoIP trunks are connected to  
different networks and services.  
Identify which extension’s calls you wish to route or block.  
Ensure that the line hunt groups are configured before using ARS. For  
Entering leading digits and assigning actions  
What are leading digits?  
Leading digits are the first digit or first several digits of an international  
access code, country code, area code or phone number.  
Leading digits can be anywhere from 1–11 characters.  
Leading digits can include numeric characters 0–9 and  
.
*
The leading digit for long-distance calls within North America is 1. As soon  
as you dial 1xxx xxx-xxxx, the system recognizes that you are making a  
long-distance call within North America.  
To place an overseas call from North America, you would dial 011, followed  
by the country code, the area code and the phone number (i.e. 011 xx xx  
xxx-xxxx). Once you dial 011, the system recognizes that the caller is  
placing an overseas call (011 are the leading digits).  
ARS will route or block calls according to the leading digits you define and  
the actions you chose in the TalkSwitch Configuration under System  
Information -> Auto Route Selection.  
Figure 43: ARS — leading digits  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Enter the leading digits you wish to route or block in the Leading Digits  
field.  
2. Select the desired Action (route to a specified line hunt group or block  
calls) from the corresponding drop-down list.  
The entries that you specify for ARS match the dialed digits with the  
longest leading digits entry. If the numbers dialed match the digits that  
you specified, the call is routed to a line hunt group or blocked according  
to the Action you selected.  
Entering carrier codes and start times  
What is a carrier code?  
In addition to leading digits, you can access your long-distance plan. It may  
be different for North America and for overseas as well as during different  
times of the day (i.e. business hours or after hours). The Carrier Code 1 and  
Carrier Code 2 columns give you theses options. TalkSwitch automatically  
adds a 2-second pause after dialing the carrier code to pick up the dialtone  
of the long-distance provider. A carrier code can be up to 24 digits long,  
including ‘*’, comma ‘,’ and ’w’. The comma causes a 2-second pause; ‘w’  
waits for the dial tone.  
3. Enter the telephone number for your long-distance plan. Enter the  
number without spaces or dashes.  
4. Select Start Time 1 for Carrier Code 1 from the drop-down list. If the  
access number is the same 24 hours a day, click the checkbox next to All  
Day. If you have a different plan for business and after hours, enter it in  
the Carrier Code 2 field and select a time for Start Time 2.  
Figure 44: Examples of leading digits  
If you dial 9 followed by a phone number that does not start with 1, 01  
or 01161, you access an outside line. The number is automatically routed  
according to the configuration of line hunt group 9.  
4 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you dial 9 followed by 1, a 3-digit area code and a 7-digit number, you  
access a line for long-distance calls in North America, as defined in line  
hunt group 82.  
If you dial 9 followed by 01, the call is blocked. At the extension, you  
hear a prompt stating “You are not permitted to dial this number” and  
then a normal dial tone.  
If you dial 9 followed by 01161, an area code and a phone number, you  
access a line for calls to Australia, as defined in line hunt group 83.  
Figure 45: ARS and line hunt groups  
Line hunt group 80  
is used for Same  
Line Connect. If  
line hunt group 80  
is enabled, it will  
be subject to ARS  
blocking rules.  
Set local extension hunt group access  
By default, all line hunt groups for each local extension are enabled. If you  
wish to restrict access to some line hunt groups, you need to disable the line  
hunt groups at the local extension.  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Select System Information -> Local Extensions.  
3. Click the Hunt Group Access button.  
4. Remove the checkmark (by clicking it) next to the line hunt groups you  
do not want to allow for that local extension.  
Repeat these steps for all your local extensions. When you allow access to  
line hunt groups that have ARS activated, the calls are routed through ARS.  
Direct Line Access  
If you enable Direct Line Access on an extension, calls placed from that  
local extension are routed to the designated line hunt group. If ARS is  
enabled on that line hunt group, the calls are routed through ARS.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 46: Outgoing call options  
Emergency Service Numbers section  
The 911 emergency access number is always allowed through ARS, even if  
the line is blocked.  
Password Protection  
We recommend that the administrator password protection be enabled when  
you use automatic route selection and toll restriction. Enable the password  
protection in the TalkSwitch configuration software under System  
Information -> Administration.  
Enter a 4- to 8-digit numeric password.  
Telephone Line 3-Way Calling Services  
Calls on telephone lines with the telephone company‘s 3-way calling service  
are not routed through ARS. They are either allowed or blocked.  
Call Detail Record (CDR) Logging  
For information on CDR, please refer to Chapter 4: Call Detail Record (CDR)  
4 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Route Selection Examples  
Blocking international calls, with exceptions  
Leading Digits  
Action  
Objective  
01  
1
Block Calls  
Block Calls  
International calls are restricted.  
Calls in North America are restricted.  
1212  
Hunt Group 1 Allow calls to New York area code 212  
using Line Hunt Group 1.  
10  
Block Calls  
Using alternative long distance provider.  
Restrict access to premium services  
Leading Digits  
Action  
Objective  
1900  
1976  
900  
Block Calls  
Block Calls  
Block Calls  
Block Calls  
Restrict access to premium inbound calling  
services.  
976  
2.2.6 Fax information  
TalkSwitch provides you with different options to configure your office for  
fax calls. The advantages and disadvantages of each option are described  
below, so that you can choose the best solution for your office.  
Dedicated fax line  
You may already have an incoming dedicated fax line. For more information,  
Advantages: It is easy to set up and you don’t need to change the way your  
fax handles calls.  
Disadvantages: The dedicated fax line cannot be shared with the other  
phone devices (i.e. You cannot make an outbound voice call on your fax  
line). The dedicated fax line costs money and may not often be used.  
Distinctive Ring fax detection  
Distinctive ring is a service provided by your phone company. A second  
phone number is added to the same physical telephone line. For more  
Advantages: It does not require a second physical line for faxes. More  
telephone lines can be added as you grow and you can keep the same fax  
arrangement.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Disadvantages: You only have one line and can only handle one call at a  
time. The phone company may charge a fee for a distinctive ring.  
Automatic fax detection with the auto attendant  
An auto attendant can detect incoming fax calls and route them  
accordingly. For more information, see 2.2.6.3 Automatic fax detection on  
Advantages: Calls are automatically handled for you, no distinctive ring  
service and no listening to ring patterns are required. Incoming phone lines  
are shared between all phones and faxes, making better use of your  
resources.  
Disadvantages: Older fax machines do not emit a CNG tone and the auto  
attendant cannot detect them.  
2.2.6.1 Dedicated fax line  
If you have a dedicated fax line or number, your fax machine should be  
connected to an extension jack on the same unit as the fax line. Leave this  
line directly connected to your fax machine. Connect the remaining  
incoming telephone lines to your unit. Incoming telephone lines will be  
handled by the unit and your fax will work the way it has always worked.  
Figure 47: Dedicated fax line  
After installing TalkSwitch, the fax machine remains on its own dedicated line.  
All incoming telephone lines are shared by the remaining office phones.  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Select System Information -> Fax Information.  
3. In the Dedicated fax line section, select the fax number from the  
drop-down list next to Fax number:.  
4. In the Fax extension section, select the extension number where your  
fax is connected.  
5 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Save settings to TalkSwitch.  
Example: If your fax machine is connected to E8 on the rear of unit 1, select  
extension number 118 for units with 8 extension jacks or 113 for units with  
4 extension jacks. If your fax machine is connected to E8 on a unit with Unit  
ID 2, the fax extension number is 128.  
Figure 48: Fax information  
If you do not see your fax number in the list, make sure you have activated  
the line in the TalkSwitch configuration software under  
System Information -> Telephone Lines.  
Figure 49: Telephone lines  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
By default, when a dedicated line and a fax extension have been selected  
for the first time, the software automatically configures the incoming call  
handling properties for that line to ring only the fax extension that you  
have specified.  
2.2.6.2 Distinctive ring fax detection  
A single telephone line can have two assigned numbers with a different ring  
pattern for each number. Based on the ring pattern, you pick up the phone  
or let the fax answer the call.  
Figure 50: Distinctive ring without TalkSwitch  
Distinctive  
RIng 1  
Distinctive  
RIng 2  
Figure 51: Distinctive ring with TalkSwitch  
After installing TalkSwitch, it automatically detects the distinctive ring pattern.  
Faxes are automatically routed to the fax machine and calls to the phones.  
Distinctive  
RIng 1  
Distinctive  
RIng 2  
Here is how TalkSwitch handles incoming calls:  
The unit automatically routes faxes to the fax machine and calls to the  
telephone.  
One of the incoming lines will have a distinctive ring number assigned to it.  
The unit recognizes this number as an incoming fax line. Follow the steps  
below:  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Select System Information -> Telephone Lines.  
3. Choose the line number for the incoming fax and click in the box next to  
Activate line.  
5 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. In the Phone numbers section beside Main number, enter the telephone  
number that people dial to call your office.  
Figure 52: Telephone lines  
5. Click the checkbox beside Distinctive Ring 1:  
6. Enter the distinctive ring number in the text field. This is the number  
people will call to get your fax machine.  
7. Click Fax Information.  
8. In the Dedicated fax line section, select the fax number from the  
drop-down list next to Fax number:  
9. In the Fax extension section, select the extension number where your fax  
is connected.  
10. Save settings to the unit.  
2.2.6.3 Automatic fax detection  
Provided all calls are answered by the auto attendant, it can detect  
incoming fax calls and will route calls to their destination.  
If an auto attendant is already configured, do the following:  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software if not already open.  
2. Select Call Handling -> Auto Attendant.  
3. Select Auto Attendant 1. You can configure additional auto attendants  
later.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. In the drop-down menu next to If a fax call is detected:, select go to local  
extension and select 118 (113 for units with 4 extension jacks).  
Figure 53: Fax routing  
5. Save settings to the unit.  
Set up at least one auto attendant to answer all incoming calls, play a  
recorded message, allow callers to dial their party’s extension or dial 0 for a  
receptionist. For more information, see 2.4.2.1 Adding/configuring an auto  
2.2.7 Local extensions  
Local extensions can be analog phones connected to any of the extension  
jacks at the back of TalkSwitch or IP phones on the same subnet registered  
with your TalkSwitch system. For more details on connectivity, see  
1.8 Connecting devices on page 15. Local extensions are activated with the  
associated voice mailbox by default. Voice mailboxes for each local  
extension can be de-activated in the Voicemail folder.  
Activating a local extension for use with an analog (regular) phone  
By default, all analog extension ports are active. Plug phones into the  
extension ports and you are ready to make and receive calls.  
Figure 54: Analog extension  
5 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring a local extension for use with a IP phone  
1. Open the configuration software.  
2. Select System Information -> Local Extensions.  
3. Change the radio button from Regular Extension to IP Extension.  
4. The default Username and Password are <user ext#> and <pass ext#>.  
Change either as required.  
Figure 55: IP extension  
Please refer to the configuration guide for your IP phone in the  
TalkSwitch documentation folder. If you are using a third-party IP phone,  
refer to the user guide for that phone.  
Once the phone has been programmed with the extension number,  
username, password, registrar and proxy information you can confirm  
registration as follows:  
1. Connect the IP phone to the LAN with the Ethernet cable.  
2. Connect the power to the IP phone.  
3. Click the Refresh button when the phone indicates that it is registered.  
Additional fields  
Caller ID Information section  
Last name/First name:  
Enter the last and first name of the person associated with the extension. If  
you want to include the person in the dial-by-name directory used by the  
auto attendant, you must enter the last name. The name entered displays on  
the Caller ID of other local extensions. The person using that extension is  
required to record her/his name for the directory.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If a name was not recorded before you set up the associated voice  
mailbox, pick up the handset, press  
and press 4.  
+ <mailbox number>  
* *  
For VoIP calls, use: [this number]  
Select the number you want to display at the remote location when VoIP  
calls are placed from this extension. If Default VoIP number is selected, the  
phone number associated with the outgoing VoIP port is used. This selection  
makes the most sense if your VoIP numbers have been configured to handle  
all inbound calls the same way.  
For <Service Provider> VoIP calls, use:  
Figure 56: IP extension username and password  
Phone Type  
If you have a TalkSwitch phone connected to this extension, select the  
model of phone. TalkSwitch sets have some integrated features that will not  
work unless the proper phone is specified. Features include intercom paging,  
group paging over the speaker, and message waiting counter on the TS-80,  
TS-200, TS-400 and TS-600 phones.  
For the IP extensions, TalkSwitch requires IP phones that have G.711 CODEC  
support.  
The IP phones officially supported by TalkSwitch are:  
Polycom Series — 301, 430, 501, 601 (minor support differences  
between models)  
Grandstream — GXP-2000 (Excellent low budget phone)  
Counterpath — Eyebeam soft client.  
5 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When Polycom or Grandstream is selected, the username and password  
are fixed and not editable.  
Other phones may work with the system, but not all the features may be  
supported. We strongly recommend that you only use the IP phones  
supported by TalkSwitch.  
Figure 57: Phone types  
Direct Line Access... (button)  
This feature allows users to access an outbound line without dialing extra  
digits. When the extension goes off-hook or a number is dialed on a IP  
phone without first dialing a hunt group, Direct Line Access allows you to  
configure the extension to access a specific hunt group automatically for  
outbound calls.  
Example: You may have a fax machine connected to this extension and  
don‘t want to reprogram the speed dial numbers. Click Direct Line Access  
and choose the hunt group. As soon as the fax goes off-hook, the unit finds  
an available line.  
Warning: When using Direct Line Access with an analog phone, you hear  
the telephone company dial tone when you pick up the handset. The  
following features are only available from the TalkSwitch internal dial  
tone:  
Intercom calling  
Hold and retrieve  
Line hunt groups  
Voicemail retrieval/access  
Call pick-up  
P.A. access,  
Parked call retrieval  
Do Not Disturb functions  
Entering command mode  
To obtain an internal dial tone at an extension which has Direct Line  
Access enabled, dial Flash after going off-hook on an analog set. On a IP  
#
phone, dial  
, then press Dial, Send or  
.
* *  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hunt Group Access... (button)  
You can permit or restrict specific hunt group access to the extension. Click  
the checkbox next to the Line hunt groups that you want to allow for this  
extension.  
2.2.8 Remote extensions  
A remote extension allows you to connect an external telephone number.  
This could be a cell phone or a number to your office. You can have it  
operate similar to a local extension in your office. Any external telephone  
number can be configured as a remote extension (i.e. cell phone, PDA, home  
telephone or branch office).  
With remote extensions, you can have calls forwarded directly from your  
office to any phone number you choose. You can choose to screen callers. If  
the remote extension is busy or unanswered, calls can be transferred back to  
your office voicemail, another extension or forwarded to another out-of-  
office telephone number (e.g. to a business partner’s cell phone).  
To set up remote extensions, see Figure 58 and follow the steps below.  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Select System Information -> Remote Extensions.  
3. Click on a remote extension number, starting with 210. Add more  
numbers as needed.  
If a TalkSwitch has Unit ID 2, the remote extension numbers are 220–229.  
Unit ID 3 has remote extensions 230-239 and Unit ID 4 240-249.  
4. Click in the checkbox next to Activate Extension <ext>.  
5. Enter a last and a first name into the Last name: and First name: fields to  
identify the extension.  
6. Enter the external phone number.  
Enter the number the same way you are dialing it from a regular phone.  
#
You may use digits 0–9, space, comma, dash,  
and  
.
*
A comma creates a two-second pause in the dialing string.  
7. In the drop-down list next to Connect using:, we recommend that you  
leave it at Hunt Group 9 unless you have pre-configured another group.  
5 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. If you have a 3-Way Calling or Transfer and Clear service from the phone  
company, click the checkbox next to Use Same Line Connect.  
9. Save settings to the unit.  
Figure 58: Remote extensions  
Once your remote extensions are configured, calls can be forwarded by the  
auto attendant or transferred by someone in your office. There are 10  
remote extensions available per TalkSwitch unit.  
Use Same Line Connect  
Check this box to allow incoming calls to use the same line when  
forwarding it to the remote extension. This feature allows only one line  
to be used when forwarding incoming calls to a remote extension. It can  
only be used when the line of the originating incoming call has 3-Way  
Calling/Conference or Transfer service (Centrex/Plexar). If the line does  
not have any of these services, the call will be forwarded using the hunt  
group chosen in the Connect using: drop-down list.  
If you have a Transfer and Clear service on your line(s) and want to have  
TalkSwitch clear lines after forwarding calls to remote extensions, you  
need to enable Clear telephone line after call transferred (Options ->  
Transfer Options). If your service requires the remote extension to  
answer the call before the transfer can be made, use one of the screening  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
5 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
options in Call Handling -> Remote Extensions in the drop-down list  
under the Answered tab.  
Remote extensions do not have the ability to transfer calls manually  
when using Same Line Connect.  
When using Same Line Connect, callers hear silence while they are on  
hold. The callers are on hold at the telephone company and not at  
TalkSwitch. If you want callers to hear music while they are on hold for  
calls forwarded to remote extensions, don’t use Same Line Connect. It is  
best to experiment with different settings in order to decide what works  
best for your configuration.  
Forwarding calls to a remote extension  
Manually from a local extension:  
Analog phone: Press Flash and the remote extension number (e.g. 211).  
IP phone: Press Transfer and the remote extension number followed by  
#
Dial, Send or  
. For more details, see Appendix I: Functions and  
commands for IP phones.  
From an auto attendant:  
The auto attendant can be configured to route the calls to your remote  
extension. The auto attendant might say: “To reach Mr. A’s cell phone,  
press 1, to reach his office, press 2 or press 0 to reach a receptionist.” You  
can also instruct callers to dial the extension directly at the auto  
attendant. You could use this auto attendant as a company greeting or  
within your call cascade sequence at your local extension. For details,  
From a call cascade:  
A call cascade sequence can route a call to a remote extension.  
If there is no answer at your desk, the call is transferred to your cell  
phone. If you don‘t answer your cell phone, the call is forwarded to your  
office voicemail. The caller hears music on hold. For details, refer to  
Transferring calls from a remote extension  
1. Press and dial any local extension, remote extension, or ring  
* *  
group, or press  
voicemail.  
again and a mailbox number to transfer the call to  
*
6 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Figure 59: Remote extensions  
2.2.9 Extension ring groups  
An extension ring group is a group of local extensions that ring in unison.  
TalkSwitch supports 10 ring groups with numbers 300 to 309. They are  
accessible from local extensions and through the auto attendant. By default,  
extension 300 is configured to ring all extensions.  
A phone system with 4 units can support a combination of 32 analog and  
IP extensions with a maximum of 20 IP extensions.  
Ring groups features  
independent call cascade  
distinctive ring cadence  
call screening capabilities  
Setting up extension ring groups  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Select System Information -> Extension Ring Groups.  
3. Choose an Extension Ring Group number, starting with 300.  
4. Click in the checkbox next to Activate Ring Group 300.  
5. Enter a name in the field next to Ring Group Name:.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
6 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. In the Set Ring Group window, choose the local extensions you want to  
ring in unison.  
7. Select a Ring pattern: from the drop-down list to identify the incoming  
call before you pick up the phone.  
8. Save settings to TalkSwitch.  
Figure 60: Ring groups  
Different uses for extension ring groups  
You can send calls to specific groups of employees.  
Example: If you have a company with several departments, you can  
configure extension ring group 300 for the sales department to ring  
extensions 111, 112, 113, and 114. Ring group 301 might be for technical  
support, ringing extensions 115 and 116.  
Identify types of calls by different ring patterns  
Example: You are the president of a company and you don‘t want to handle  
calls from the general public, yet you want to be alerted when important  
colleagues try to contact you. Your regular local extension may be 111 for  
most people, but you can configure an extension ring group 305 to ring your  
extension with a different ring pattern. You tell your colleagues to choose  
extension 305 at the auto attendant or ask to be transferred to extension  
305 when speaking to someone in the office. You can tell by the ring  
pattern if the call is to 305 or 111.  
6 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Forwarding calls to a ring group  
Manually from a local extension:  
Analog phone: Press Flash and the ring group number  
IP phone:  
Press Xfer or Transfer and enter the ring group  
#
number, then press Dial or  
.
From an auto attendant:  
Auto attendants can be configured to send calls to ring groups just as  
they do to extensions. The auto attendant might say: “To reach the sales  
department, press 1, to reach Mrs. A‘s office, press 2, or press 0 to reach a  
receptionist.” You could use this auto attendant as a company greeting or  
within a call cascade sequence at a ring group.  
From a call cascade:  
The call cascade sequence can route the call to ring group 300.  
Example: If there is no answer at your desk, the call is transferred to the  
sales department. If no one answers the phone in sales, the call is  
forwarded to your voicemail. If music on hold is enabled, the caller hears  
music throughout the entire process.  
2.2.10 On-Hold/Ringback  
The Music on Hold feature lets you provide music or a recorded message for  
callers while they are waiting to be routed or transferred.  
Callers tend to react more positively to transfers or waits if they hear music.  
Companies can also play recorded advertisements or provide information  
about their business.  
There are two ways to add music on hold to your system:  
an external audio source  
an internal file  
2.2.10.1 External audio source  
An external audio source could be a CD player, tape player or a PC media  
player that you connect to TalkSwitch.  
Advantages: The variety and length of music are virtually unlimited.  
Disadvantages: Requires extra, dedicated equipment to be connected and  
running constantly with separate sound sources for each unit  
1. Connect your external audio source to the unit using an 1/8" mono cable.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
6 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Figure 61: Music port  
If you have more than one unit connected to the LAN and you are using an  
external music source, you need to connect the source to all units. Use a  
1/8" audio splitter, available at most electronics stores. If you are using a  
.wav file loaded on the unit, the music file is copied to all units on the  
LAN.  
You can use separate audio sources for each unit.  
2. Once the audio source(s) is (are) connected to TalkSwitch,  
turn it (them) on.  
3. Connect the unit to your computer and open your configuration  
software.  
4. Select System Information -> On-Hold/Ringback.  
5. In the On-Hold Settings, select Play music whose source is connected to the  
MUSIC jack. See Figure 62.  
6. Save settings to the unit.  
Figure 62: Music on hold  
6 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On-Hold Settings  
There are three options when callers are placed on hold:  
1. Play double beep’ tones to callers when they are on hold. This is the  
default setting. No additional configuration is required.  
2. Play music whose source is connected to the MUSIC jack, if you have a  
music source connected to the music jack.  
3. Play music from file loaded on TalkSwitch, if you have a sound file  
loaded. You can convert MP3 and other file formats using a utility  
like Audio Converter or Ripper. Download a converter at:  
www.audioi.com. Check the volume of music on hold with a test  
call. Adjust the levels as required. This setting is not real-time. Save  
the configuration to the unit and make another test call.  
2.2.10.2 Internal audio file  
You can load a digital audio file into memory.  
Advantages: No additional equipment is required. You can use the same file  
for all units in the system. This provides seamless music for calls transferred  
across the network.  
Disadvantage: The length of the recording is limited by your memory  
capacity.  
Memory can be expanded by adding TalkSwitch memory cards.  
1. Connect the unit to your computer and open your configuration  
software.  
2. Select System Information -> On-Hold/Ringback.  
3. In the On-Hold Settings section, select Play music from file loaded on  
TalkSwitch See Figure 68.  
4. Click the Load wav file... button. An information box displays the  
required format for the digital audio file. This file must be 8 KHz, 8-bit,  
mono, µ-law and saved as .wav format.  
If your desired digital audio file conforms to the required format, click Yes,  
or else click No to exit.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
6 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 63: Music file format  
5. If you clicked Yes, the Load Audio File window displays. Browse to the  
location of the desired digital audio file, select the file and click on  
Open.  
6. In Transfer Settings, seen in Figure 64 on page 66, select Music if you  
want the caller to hear music instead of a ringback tone.  
7. Save settings to the unit.  
Set the volume for Music on Hold  
TalkSwitch offers the ability to adjust the volume of music on hold  
playback. In On-Hold Settings, to increase or decrease the sound level, use  
the drop-down list for Playback volume for music file:  
Figure 64: Volume adjustment  
Transfer Settings  
Decide if you would like your callers to hear ringing, music or double beep  
tones while they are being transferred.  
If you connect a music source to the music jack but do not enable Music  
on Hold, the caller hears both music and beep sounds. When the callers  
make a selection at the auto attendant to go to extensions with call  
screening enabled, they will hear ringing and music.  
6 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2.3 VOICEMAIL  
This section deals with the internal voicemail system included in  
TalkSwitch. TalkSwitch provides three types of voicemail:  
Local  
The mailbox is associated with a local extension. By default, each local  
extension has its own voice mailbox.  
Remote  
The mailbox is associated with a remote extension, such as a mobile  
phone. These mailboxes must be assigned by the user at the extenion.  
General  
The general system mailboxes are for general use or group voicemail.  
They are not tied to any specific extension.  
2.3.1 Mailbox options  
Local, remote, and general voice mailboxes can be configured the same way.  
The following procedure describes the setup of local extension voicemail.  
You can use the same steps for setting up remote and general voicemail.  
1. Open your TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Select Voicemail -> Local Ext. Voicemail.  
3. Click Activate as mailbox <ext>.  
Under remote extensions, make sure that the remote extension has been  
enabled, otherwise you cannot activate its mailbox.  
4. You can use this option to relay information. If you want to prevent  
callers from leaving messages, select Activate as announcement <ext>  
from the drop-down list. Callers hear an announcement. During the  
announcement, callers can dial 0 or  
attendant before getting disconnected.  
to get back to the auto  
*
5. In the Mail Box Options section, select one of the actions to perform  
when a caller presses 0 during mode 1 or during mode 2. The action  
options are the same for the different modes.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
6 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Figure 65: Mailbox and mode configuration Load Greeting (button)  
If you require additional memory for voicemail and auto attendants,  
memory cards can be purchased from www.talkswitch.com or from your  
local reseller. For details on how to use voicemail, see 3.8 Using the  
You can load a pre-recorded voicemail greeting from your PC to TalkSwitch.  
The file must be an 8KHz, 8-bit, mono, µ-law .wav file.  
2.3.2 Voicemail notification  
2.3.2.1 Dialed notification  
Voicemail Notification Settings section  
Under the Dialed Notification tab, choose the process by which you want to  
be notified — Remote Phone or Pager, or both.  
Remote Phone  
If you want to be notified at another location when new messages arrive,  
use remote phone notification.  
1. Click the checkbox next to Remote Phone.  
6 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Enter the remote phone number as it would normally be dialed from  
where the unit is located.  
Example: If your remote phone number is 905-555-1111 and you dial  
905-555-1111 to call your phone locally, you would enter 905-555-1111 as  
the remote phone number.  
Figure 66: Dialed Notification  
Notification Settings (button)  
Click on the Notification Settings button and choose one of the two  
options to handle notification calls.  
Figure 67: Notification settings  
1. Perform the notification process once:  
When the unit detects the call was answered, it will play the notification  
message once only, then discontinue any attempts to re-connect.  
#
2. The unit continues to re-connect until the recipient presses  
or  
*
and considers the notification attempt successful if the person at the  
#
remote phone presses  
the call and listen to messages.  
to skip listening to messages or  
to accept  
*
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
6 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This option is useful for cell phones where the cell phone company plays a  
“subscriber not available” message instead of a busy tone. Once the cell  
phone is answered, TalkSwitch prompts you to respond to the incoming  
#
voicemail with  
or  
.
*
1. Click the checkbox next to Pager if you want to be notified by pager  
when new messages arrive.  
2. Enter the pager number as you would normally dial it from your  
TalkSwitch location.  
3. Enter the numeric message to be displayed on the pager.  
Configure Notification Options (button)  
Define how TalkSwitch dials out of your office when notifying you of a  
voicemail. If the first connection is not successful, determine the number of  
times TalkSwitch continues to attempt the connection.  
When you choose to be notified by pager and remote phone, TalkSwitch  
ensures that both locations have been contacted before finishing the  
notification process.  
Figure 68: Configure notification options  
Dial notification phone number using:  
Select the hunt group you want to use for the remote phone and pager  
notification calls. You can also adjust the number of rings before it aborts  
the attempt and follows the parameters listed in the next section.  
If attempt unsuccessful, try again:  
These parameters control how many times TalkSwitch tries to notify the  
remote phone or pager before it aborts the notification attempt. You can  
specify the time interval between attempts.  
7 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.3.2.2 Message waiting light  
You can set a message waiting light to indicate when a message has been  
received by an extension. Select the local extensions in your system where  
you want the light to flash when a message arrives.  
You can configure this feature for each mailbox.  
1. Click on the Message Waiting Light tab.  
2. Click Edit to select the extensions to notify when new messages arrive in  
a mailbox. The Voicemail Extension Indicators window opens. By default,  
the message waiting light turns on at the extension associated with a  
local mailbox when a message is received.  
3. Click the checkbox next to the extensions to notify when new messages  
arrive in a mailbox.  
4. Click on OK when done.  
Figure 69: Extension indicators  
2.3.2.3 E-mail notification  
Voicemail notification and messages can also be forwarded to any e-mail  
account with or without an audio file of the message. If you configure the  
unit to send the voicemail message, you do not need to call to pick up  
voicemail. Notifications include caller ID data.  
You can use up to 250 e-mail addresses. You can assign up to 4 e-mail  
addresses for notification to each mailbox.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
7 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Example 1: 1 unit: 8 local extensions (can be a combination of analog  
and IP), 10 remote extensions and 10 general mailboxes with 4 e-mail  
notification addresses each (28 x 4 e-mails = 112).  
Example 2: 4 units on a LAN: 32 local extensions, 40 remote extensions and  
10 general mailboxes.  
How many unique e-mail addresses can be assigned to each mailbox?  
TalkSwitch has a limit of 250 e-mail addresses. This provides an average of  
3 unique e-mail addresses per mailbox:  
250/82 mailboxes = 3 e-mails/mailbox.  
Certain e-mail addresses may apply to more than one mailbox (e.g.  
1. Click on the E-mail Notification tab.  
Figure 70: E-mail notification tab  
2. Click the checkbox next to Enable e-mail notification.  
3. Click Edit to add or modify or remove e-mail addresses.  
Figure 71: Add, remove or modify e-mail addresses  
7 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To add an e-mail address:  
1. Click Add.  
2. Enter the name of the recipient of the e-mail notification.  
3. Enter the e-mail address of the recipient of the e-mail notification.  
4. Click one of the radio buttons next to Attachment.  
a) Yes — The entire voicemail message gets attached to the e-mail as a  
sound file in .wav format.  
b) No — The e-mail includes notification information, but there is no  
file attached.  
5. Click OK.  
Figure 72: Enter name and e-mail address  
Example of an e-mail notification:  
New message from Joe Smith (555-1234)  
The body of the e-mail reads:  
_______________________________________  
Voice Mailbox 111  
New message from Joe Smith (555-1234)  
Received: Monday, April 5 at 5:45pm  
Length: 23 seconds  
Total un-reviewed messages: 13  
Total saved messages: 2  
______________________________________  
To modify an e-mail address:  
1. Select the address you wish to modify.  
2. Click Modify. Modify the entries as needed following steps 2–5 above.  
To remove an e-mail address:  
1. Select the address you wish to remove and click Remove.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
7 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Make sure you configure the E-mail Server Settings under Voicemail ->  
Global Settings. For more information, see 2.3.3 Global Settings.  
2.3.3 Global Settings  
Figure 73: Global Settings  
These settings allow you to fine-tune your voicemail system. Any changes  
made to Global Settings affect all system voice mailboxes.  
1. Select Voicemail -> Global Settings.  
E-mail Server Settings section  
Figure 74: E-mail server settings  
In order to send e-mail notifications, the system must be programmed with  
e-mail account information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or  
administrator.  
7 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Enter the name of your Outgoing e-mail server (SMTP).  
Example: mail.mymailserver.com  
3. Enter an e-mail address in the From E-mail address field. When e-mail  
notifications arrive from the system, this e-mail address will show up in  
the From field.  
4. Enter an e-mail address in the Reply E-mail address field if you want  
responses to be handled by someone like an administrator.  
Example: [email protected]. If you leave the field empty,  
the system will use the e-mail address entered in the From field.  
5. Click More Settings to enter the parameters for server authentication.  
Figure 75: More e-mail settings  
6. If you wish to verify your settings, click Test Account Settings.  
Figure 76: Test account settings  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
7 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Global Message Waiting Indicator  
Click the checkbox next to Global Message Waiting Indicator if you would  
like the Power/Data light on the TalkSwitch unit to flash when you have  
voicemail in any TalkSwitch voice mailbox.  
Mailbox Settings section  
Next to When listening to voicemail messages always start with, select  
newest message (default) or oldest message to play first.  
Next to When pager/remote phone notification of new messages is  
activated, notify the pager/remote phone after receiving, select every new  
message or only 1st new message.  
For the Maximum recording length option, select any duration between 1  
and 8 minutes. The default setting is 2 minutes.  
Click the checkbox next to Remove blank and hang-up messages  
automatically, if you want to delete blank messages (callers hang up  
when they reach your voicemail). If you have the caller ID service from  
your telephone company and choose to keep the messages, you will be  
able to check the caller’s number when they leave a blank message.  
2.3.3.1 Voicemail manager  
The two options, View Mailbox Data and Reset Mailboxes, in the Voicemail  
Management section of the Global Settings window are also available under  
the main menu bar: Tools -> Voicemail Manager...  
Figure 77: Voicemail manager  
View Mailbox Data (button) in the Global Settings window, or  
View Status (button) in the Voicemail Manager window:  
View the details for each voice mailbox and announcement followed by a  
summary to manage the voicemail resources of the system.  
7 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 78: Mailbox data  
Reset Mailboxes (button)  
All greetings, messages and settings for the selected mailbox(es)  
can be reset.  
Figure 79: Reset Mailboxes  
If you need to delete a password for a particular voice mailbox (i.e. a user  
has forgotten the password):  
1. Tools -> Voicemail Manager (main menu).  
2. Click the Delete Password... button  
3. Select the mailbox from the Delete password for mailbox: drop-down list.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
7 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 80: Delete the password of a voice mailbox  
4. Click OK.  
2.4 CALL HANDLING  
2.4.1 Modes  
You may want the unit to handle calls differently depending on the time of  
the day, the day of the week or on holidays. These configurations are called  
Modes. You can configure all aspects of call handling (i.e. call cascade and  
auto attendants) differently for each mode. Define when you would like the  
unit to switch modes and name the modes to suit your environment.  
1. Select Call Handling -> Modes.  
2. Create a name for Mode 1 and Mode 2. Here, we have named them  
Business Hours and After Hours. See Figure 81 on page 79.  
3. Click the checkbox next to Use Automatic Mode Switching if you want the  
modes to switch automatically.  
4. Set the day and time when you would like the modes to change. You can  
click Monday through Sunday and create unique settings for each day.  
5. To use manual mode switching, change the modes at any local extension.  
Switch modes manually using telephone touchtone commands.  
#
1. Dial  
or  
55 on a IP phone to enter command mode. Enter your  
*
password if required.  
#
2. Dial any of the following commands and press  
to confirm.  
30 TalkSwitch tells you what mode it is currently using.  
31 Change TalkSwitch to mode 1.  
32 Change TalkSwitch to mode 2.  
33 Change TalkSwitch to holiday mode.  
Warning: The mode will not change if you are logged into the  
configuration software tool at the time of the scheduled mode switch.  
7 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Figure 81: Modes  
To set holiday mode:  
3. Click the checkbox next to Enable Holiday Mode.  
4. Click Settings.  
a) Select the country in the drop-down list next to Populate calendar  
with holidays observed in. See Figure 82 on page 79.  
a) Select any date in the calendar.  
a) Click Add >>.  
a) Repeat b) and c) until all required holidays are listed.  
a) Select the mode to Use for Call Cascade settings and click OK.  
Figure 82: Holiday mode  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
7 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can choose how incoming calls to any TalkSwitch extension are routed  
during Holiday Mode. Use the menu to select whether a call on a holiday will  
follow an extension‘s Mode 1 or Mode 2 call cascade (routing) settings. For  
example, if Mode 2 is used when the office is closed, you could choose to use  
Mode 2 call cascade for all extensions during holidays.  
2.4.2 Auto attendant  
TalkSwitch handles inbound calls with an auto attendant. Auto attendants  
answer all incoming calls, play a recorded message and route callers to their  
requested extensions.  
If the receptionist is away from the desk, or if you do not have a  
receptionist, an auto attendant responds and gives callers options. Calls  
cannot follow an extension‘s call cascade sequence until an auto attendant  
has answered or the caller has been manually transferred.  
TalkSwitch has nine auto attendants. They can be used together to create  
powerful call routing options.  
Callers can dial local extensions, remote extensions, extension ring groups  
(300-309), voicemail to leave and retrieve messages, access call back/  
call bridge and enter command mode to make changes to the system  
configuration from the handset.  
400 series mailboxes can be dialed at the auto attendant without  
#
pressing  
first. This is useful for providing virtual extensions associated  
with a mailbox for telecommuters or other part-time staff.  
2.4.2.1 Adding/configuring an auto attendant  
Follow the steps below to set up an auto attendant to answer all incoming  
calls, play your recorded message and enable callers to dial their party‘s  
extension or dial 0 for a receptionist.  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software, if not already open.  
2. Select Call Handling -> Auto Attendant.  
3. Select Auto Attendant 1 and type a name into the Auto Attendant Name  
field. You can configure and name 2–9 later.  
4. Follow these settings as shown in Figure 85. Set up your receptionist at  
extension 114. If you have other settings, enter the appropriate values  
for your office.  
8 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Extension 114 should be used as the receptionist because it is the  
extension that works during a power failure.  
Figure 83: Configuring auto attendant  
5. Callers who don‘t have a touchtone phone can be routed to the  
receptionist at extension 114.  
6. Set the time from the drop-down list After the auto Attendant has  
finished playing and no selection has been made within (0–30 sec.).  
7. Select go to local ext. and select 114 from the drop-down lists.  
You can record the other 8 auto attendants. The total combined recording  
time is 30 minutes. The 30 minutes are shared with voicemail. You can  
expand the built-in memory up to 9 hours using a TalkSwitch memory card.  
When two or more units are networked (48-CA/CVA models only), they  
share the same 9 auto attendants. When an auto attendant message is  
recorded on any TalkSwitch unit, it is automatically copied to all the  
other units on the same LAN. This feature helps reduce network traffic  
and allows the system to continue functioning even if a unit loses power  
or is disconnected from the LAN.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
8 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.2.2 Record, play or erase auto attendant messages  
You can record an auto attendant from any local extension or remote phone  
using touchtone commands.  
1. Pick up a local extension or dial into TalkSwitch from an external source.  
At the auto attendant:  
#
2. Press  
to enter command mode.  
3. Enter the administrator password if required.  
4. Begin entering the touchtone commands listed below and follow the  
TalkSwitch instructions.  
#
5. Press  
to confirm the entry before continuing with other commands  
or exiting command mode.  
6. Press or hang up to exit.  
*
#
Example: From the local extension, pick up the handset and press  
to  
#
enter command mode. If you want to record Auto Attendant 1, dial 4 1  
#
and follow the prompt. Press 5 1  
to listen to your recording. To record  
#
auto attendant 2, dial 4 2  
and so on.  
Record Instructions (button)  
Click this button to display a dialog box showing the instructions on how to  
record and play an auto attendant using a telephone. The unit adjusts the  
recording volume for optimal recordings.  
Figure 84: Recording instructions  
What should an auto attendant say?  
“Welcome to the ABC company. If you know  
your party‘s 3-digit extension you may dial it  
now. To reach our receptionist, press 0 or  
stay on the line.“  
8 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Load Auto Attendant (button)  
Click this button to display a dialog box with instructions on how to load an  
auto attendant using a pre-recorded .wav file. If you want to have auto  
attendants professionally recorded, make sure to specify that the files have  
to be 8KHz, 8bit, mono, and saved as a µ-law format .wav file.  
Figure 85: Audio file format  
Failure to record an auto attendant will cause your office phone to answer  
with no message. The caller will hear silence and might assume that the  
call did not get connected.  
Erase Instructions (button)  
Click this button to display a dialog box showing the instructions on how to  
erase an auto attendant using a telephone. It is a good idea to erase unused  
auto attendants. They share the memory with voicemail.  
Figure 86: Erase auto attendant  
With the use of a memory card you can  
extend the time for voicemail and auto  
attendant recordings to up to 9 hours.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
8 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 87: View auto attendant time usage  
View Auto Attendant Time Usage  
To view the amount of time used by all  
auto attendants, go to the main menu:  
Tools -> Memory Usage -> Auto  
Attendant.  
You may have unused auto attendant  
messages. If you delete them, you can free  
up memory.  
2.4.2.3 Select routing options for each auto attendant  
The caller can select the single-digit options 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.  
If the caller selects 0 then:  
The 0 option is used to direct callers to a receptionist. You may want to  
configure this option to ring a local extension. For an After Hours auto  
attendant, use this option to forward calls to a remote extension for  
emergency purposes or direct callers to a voice mailbox.  
If the caller selects 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 then:  
TalkSwitch can perform one of several actions in the table below at the  
selected auto attendant.  
perform no action  
go to voice mailbox  
If you don’t want to use a particular option,  
set it to perform no action.  
You can configure any single-digit option to  
send a caller immediately to voicemail. Select  
the appropriate mailbox.  
go to local extension  
go to remote ext.  
You can provide a single-digit option to ring  
a particular extension.  
You can provide a single-digit option to ring  
a particular remote extension.  
go to VoIP location  
Select a VoIP location in the 250-299 range and  
TalkSwitch will forward the call automatically  
to the specified VoIP location.  
8 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
go to ring group  
You can provide a single-digit option to ring  
an extension ring group.  
go to auto attendant  
TalkSwitch can direct callers to multiple levels  
of auto attendants. For example, you might  
want to use your main auto attendant to  
provide language options like “press 1 for  
English, 2 for Spanish.” In this example, you  
configure option 1 to go to auto attendant 2  
(English version) and option 2 to go to auto  
attendant 3 (Spanish version).  
queue at ring group  
play announcement  
This directs calls to a group of extensions and  
keeps callers on hold until a member of the ring  
group is free to take the call.  
You can set any unused voicemail to play  
announcement only. Announcements are useful  
for providing directions, business hours and/or  
other information. Inform callers that they can  
press  
to return to the auto attendant or  
*
you can program a 0 option to route to any  
other extension or greeting.  
go to directory  
If you want to enable callers to locate employee  
extension numbers by last name, select this  
option.  
By default, TalkSwitch waits 1.5 seconds after your caller enters a digit  
before following with another digit. If no other digit is received,  
TalkSwitch follows the action set for the single digit. This allows caller to  
use 1 for the auto attendant option and 111 as an extension number.  
2.4.2.4 Automatic fax detection  
If a fax call is detected then:  
TalkSwitch can automatically detect incoming faxes and route them to your  
fax machine. To do this, the auto attendant must answer all incoming calls  
and listen for the CNG tone emitted by the incoming fax call. If a CNG tone is  
detected within nine seconds, the call is identified as a fax. If no CNG tone is  
detected, the auto attendant will wait for the caller to dial the appropriate  
digits or hang up.  
Some older fax machines do not emit a CNG tone and the auto attendant  
cannot detect them as an incoming fax. Also, if your auto attendant  
volume is set too high, or if your telephone lines are noisy, the auto  
attendant may not be able to detect the incoming CNG tone.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
8 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If you do not want to use fax detection, have the unit perform no action.  
If you want automatic fax detection, configure your incoming fax line to  
route faxes to extension 118. The default configuration assumes that your  
fax machine is attached to extension 118 (113 for units with four extension  
jacks).  
2.4.2.5 No selection was made at the auto attendant  
After the auto attendant has finished playing and no selection was made  
within a specified number of seconds, the unit can route the call to any  
extension including a fax machine, play an auto attendant or  
announcement, go to a voice mailbox, go to the dial-by-name directory,  
queue to a ring group or simply hang up.  
2.4.2.6 Additional features at the auto attendant  
The digits 6, 7, 8 and 9 are not available as programmable options. They are  
used for other system features.  
If 6 is dialed  
If you press 6 at the auto attendant, you are able to configure and use  
auto call back and prompted call back features. See 2.5 Call Back/Call  
Bridge on page 98 for more details about configuring call back and 3.11.2  
Using call back on page 145 for details on using call back.  
If you dial 6 at the auto attendant and Call Back is not enabled,  
TalkSwitch answers with the prompt: “I am sorry, there is no matching  
entry for these digits.  
If 7 is dialed  
TalkSwitch uses 7 to precede PBX extensions of another Centrex or PBX  
system. If TalkSwitch is not connected to another system, 7 is inactive.  
If 80–88, or 9 is dialed  
If you press 80–88 or 9 at the auto attendant, you can access Call Bridge  
if it has been enabled. See 2.5 Call Back/Call Bridge on page 98 for more  
details about configuring call bridge and 3.11.1 Using call bridge on  
page 144 for details on using call bridge.  
8 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2.4.3 Telephone Lines  
This section describes how TalkSwitch handles incoming calls based on the  
incoming line and distinctive ring numbers.  
Configure incoming calls during mode 1, 2 and holiday mode  
Each incoming telephone line has to be set to answer incoming calls using  
one of the auto attendants. In this example, we will use Auto Attendant 1  
and Mode 1 to answer all lines. If you are not using Mode 2 or Holiday Mode,  
you don‘t need to configure the settings for those modes.  
Figure 88: Call handling telephone lines  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
2. Select Call Handling -> Telephone Lines.  
3. Choose Line 1. Each additional line can be configured in succession,  
following steps 5 and 6.  
4. Select Business Hours.  
5. From the drop-down menus, select Play auto attendant Switchboard and  
immediately. This will pick up all incoming calls on Line 1 and play your  
recorded greeting.  
6. Repeat the same setting for each of your incoming lines. Start at step 4  
and choose Line 2 and apply steps 5 and 6.  
7. Save settings to the unit.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
8 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The other configuration options are described below.  
Ring Extensions only (no auto attendant is played)  
If you don‘t want the auto attendant to answer calls on this line, select  
this option. All the local extensions are set to ring immediately during  
an inbound call by default. No call cascade actions (i.e. voicemail) can be  
performed if you select this option.  
Select the local extensions you would like to ring. If you require certain  
extensions to ring in a sequence (i.e. one extension rings first, then  
another one on the second ring), click the Adjust Sequence button to  
configure.  
If you call on any line, TalkSwitch answers after 15 rings with a generic  
auto attendant so that you can still access the system to make  
configuration changes, change modes, access voicemail or dial extensions.  
Go to voice mailbox  
If you do not want to use an auto attendant but want the call to go to a  
voice mailbox, select the appropriate mailbox. The caller always hears  
one more ring than the number of rings you select. TalkSwitch uses the  
first ring to determine the ring type and to support Caller ID information.  
Remember: Callers are only directed according to settings for an auto  
attendant. Calls do not follow the call cascade settings of any of the local  
extensions programmed to ring before the auto attendant answers.  
Adjust Sequence... (button)  
This section controls how the extensions will ring before the auto attendant  
answers the call.  
If you have chosen the auto attendant to answer calls immediately, this  
section does not require configuration and is grayed out.  
If the auto attendant is set to answer after 1 or more rings, configure  
when specific extensions ring before the auto attendant answers.  
If no auto attendant is selected to answer on the specified line, specify  
when particular extensions will ring up to 9 times. Remember  
that no calls go to voicemail unless you first have an auto attendant  
answer.  
8 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.4.4 VoIP Numbers  
This section deals with how VoIP-enabled units handle incoming VoIP calls.  
For information on VoIP-enabled numbers, please refer to Chapter 5: VoIP  
1. Select a VoIP number to configure.  
2. Select the mode for which you want TalkSwitch to use these settings.  
If you entered the phone number in System Information ->  
VoIP Numbers, the number will display on the corresponding button.  
Figure 89: VoIP numbers  
Descriptions for VoIP numbers and telephone lines on the features below are  
the same.  
Ring extensions only (no auto attendant is played),  
Play auto attendant or Go to voice mailbox and  
Adjust Sequence... (button)  
This section controls how the extensions will ring before the auto attendant  
answers the call.  
If you have chosen the auto attendant to answer calls immediately, this  
section does not require configuration and is grayed out.  
If the auto attendant is set to answer after 1 or more rings, configure  
when specific extensions ring before the auto attendant answers.  
If no auto attendant is selected to answer on the specified line, specify  
when particular extensions will ring up to 9 times. Remember that no  
calls go to voicemail unless you first have an auto attendant answer.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
8 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2.4.5 Call Cascade  
2.4.5.1 Local extensions  
The call cascade feature lets you control routing options for each call to  
local, remote or ring group extensions.  
This section shows how to configure the incoming call cascade options for  
the local extensions. The call cascade routing options are engaged if the  
extension is selected by the caller, or if a call is manually transferred to the  
extension. Once a call enters an extension‘s call cascade sequence, the  
extension directs the call. It does not follow any other extension‘s options,  
even if that extension is selected in the cascade sequence. What you see in  
an extension‘s cascade sequence is exactly what you’ll get. You can set up  
the call cascade sequences differently for each scheduling mode.  
You can customize each extension individually with a wide array of features.  
It is possible to configure up to three levels of call cascade for each  
extension.  
Example: If a call reaches your desk and you are away, you can have the call  
sent to a partner at another local extension. If the partner’s extension does  
not pick up, the call could be routed to your cell phone. If your cell phone is  
turned off, the call can be returned to your office voicemail.  
Start with the steps below. You can modify the call handling options any  
time. The examples in 2.4.5.4 Call cascade examples on page 97 provide a  
starting point.  
1. Select Call Handling -> Local Extensions.  
2. Select the local extension for which you want to set up call cascade.  
3. Select one of the two modes. Call handling can be set up differently  
during business hours and after hours.  
4. Click on the tab to modify the call handling options for the given  
situation (e.g. when extension is Busy or No Answer, etc.)  
9 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Figure 90: Local extension call cascade  
If a call is transferred manually to a local extension that is busy, TalkSwitch  
follows the call cascade options for that extension.  
There are four different call cascade situations for local extensions.  
1. Busy  
2. No Answer  
3. Answered  
4. Do Not Disturb  
For each of these situations, three cascade destinations are available to  
control how you want to handle the incoming call to the extension.  
1. Busy tab  
Cascade options for forwarding calls:  
go to voice mailbox  
go to local ext.  
go to remote ext.  
go to ring group  
play announcement  
invoke Call Waiting  
go to auto attendant  
queue call  
play busy tone  
hang up  
go to VoIP location  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
9 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For more information on these features, see Using TalkSwitch on page 117.  
2. No Answer tab  
Select the number of rings and select one of the actions. The action drop-  
down list is the same as for the Busy tab except that play busy tone is  
replaced by keep ringing and there is no invoke Call Waiting and queue  
call.  
3. Answered tab  
Select play caller‘s name first to prompt callers to record their name at  
the auto attendant. When you answer the call at the extension, the  
caller’s name is announced. At this point, you can accept the call by  
#
pressing  
pressing  
or reroute the call to the cascade options on this tab by  
or by hanging up.  
*
Routing/forwarding options for rejected calls:  
go to voice mailbox  
go to local ext.  
go to remote ext.  
go to ring group  
play announcement  
go to auto attendant  
hang up  
go to VoIP location  
4. When Do Not Disturb is enabled, you will hear: “Do not disturb on” before  
the dial tone as a reminder that calls will not ring at your extension.  
9 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.5.2 Remote extensions  
Remote extension call cascade works principally the same way as the local  
extension call cascade. Please refer to 2.4.5.1 Local extensions on page 90. In  
step 1, select Call Handling -> Remote Extensions.  
Figure 91: Remote extension call cascade  
For remote extensions, there are three different call cascade options. For  
each of these options, you can control how you want to handle the  
incoming call to the extension.  
The remote extension call cascade does not have a Do Not Disturb option.  
1. Busy tab  
Cascade options for forwarding calls:  
go to voice mailbox  
go to local ext.  
go to remote ext.  
go to ring group  
play announcement  
go to auto attendant  
play busy tone  
hang up  
go to VoIP location  
For more information on these features, see Using TalkSwitch on page 117.  
2. No Answer tab — routing options if this extension is not answered  
after a specified number of rings  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
9 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Select the number of rings and select one of the actions.  
For remote extensions it is very important to allow enough time for the  
telephone network to connect to the phone. For example, a call to a cell  
phone or PDA may take 12 seconds (i.e. 2 rings) just to connect.  
The action drop-down list is the same as for the Busy tab except that the  
option play busy tone is replaced by keep ringing and there is no queue at  
ring group option.  
3. Answered tab — routing options when this extension answers or rejects a  
screened call  
Selecting play caller‘s name first prompts callers to record their name at  
the auto attendant. When you answer the call at the extension, the  
caller’s name is announced. At this point, you can accept the call by  
#
pressing  
pressing  
or reroute the call to the Cascade options on this tab by  
. If you hang up or do not answer, the call will be routed to  
*
this cascade but it may take several seconds more for the system to  
redirect the call.  
Routing/forwarding options for rejected calls:  
go to voice mailbox  
go to local ext.  
go to remote ext.  
go to ring group  
play announcement  
go to auto attendant  
hang up  
go to VoIP location  
If you select stay connected, the call cascade options are grayed out.  
TalkSwitch can forwarded calls when prompting is enabled. If you use  
one of the prompted methods for this remote extension, enable Music on  
Hold and do not use 3-way calling to forward calls to this remote  
extension, the call cascade is seamless to the callers. They hear music  
throughout the entire process of trying to locate you.  
If a call is forwarded to a remote extension from a call cascade sequence  
and has play caller‘s name first or play accept/reject prompt enabled, the  
remote extension hears: “This is Call Cascade...” instead of “This is Call  
Forward.... This indicates to you that the call is rejected and sends the  
caller to the next call cascade option of the extension that forwarded the  
call. It does not follow the remote extension‘s answer call cascade options.  
9 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.5.3 Extension ring groups call cascade  
Extension ring groups — call cascade is similar to local and remote call  
cascade. For more information, see 2.4.5.1 Local extensions on page 90 and  
The call cascade routing options are engaged if the ring group is selected  
from the auto attendant or if a call was transferred manually to the ring  
group. Once a call enters a ring group‘s call cascade sequence, the ring group  
directs the call. It does not follow any other extensions options, even if that  
extension is selected in the call cascade sequence. What you see in a ring  
group‘s call cascade sequence is exactly what you’ll get.  
Figure 92: Extension ring group call cascade  
For ring groups, like for remote extensions, there are 3 different call cascade  
options. For each of these options, you can control how to handle the  
incoming call to the extension.  
1. Busy tab — routing options when this extension is busy  
Cascade options for forwarding calls:  
go to voice mailbox  
go to local ext.  
go to remote ext.  
go to ring group  
play announcement  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
9 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
go to auto attendant  
queue at ring group  
play busy tone (example, if a fax machine is at the extension)  
hang up  
go to VoIP location  
For more information on these features, see Using TalkSwitch on page 117.  
2. No Answer tab — routing options if this extension is not answered  
after a specified number of rings  
Select the number of rings and select one of the actions. The action drop  
down list is the same as for the Busy tab except that the option play busy  
tone is replaced by keep ringing.  
3. Answered tab — routing options when this extension answers or rejects a  
screened call  
Select play caller‘s name first to prompt callers to record their name at  
the auto attendant. When you answer the call at the extension, it  
announces the caller’s name. At this point, you can accept the call by  
#
pressing  
or reroute the call to the Cascade options on this tab by  
hanging up or pressing  
.
*
Routing/forwarding options for rejected calls:  
go to voice mailbox  
go to local ext.  
go to remote ext.  
go to ring group  
play announcement  
go to auto attendant  
hang up  
go to VoIP number  
9 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.5.4 Call cascade examples  
If my extension is busy  
Figure 93: Example 1 — Extension busy  
If I am away from my desk  
Figure 94: Example 2 — Away from the desk  
Screening calls from a remote extension  
Figure 95: Example 3 — Screening calls  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
9 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If I don’t want to be disturbed (only local extensions)  
Figure 96: Example 4 — Do not disturb  
2.5 CALL BACK/CALL BRIDGE  
Call Back and Call Bridge work together as your personal long-distance  
operator. Whether you are across town or around the world, you can place  
calls from your office telephone or VoIP number(s) and access your  
long-distance savings plan.  
You can make a direct call to TalkSwitch, activate call bridge and dial the  
telephone number you want. TalkSwitch dials the number from your office  
telephone or VoIP trunk and connects the call you made to TalkSwitch and  
the call TalkSwitch made from your office to the dialed party.  
Two call back methods  
Auto Call Back lets you program the number where you can be reached as  
the call back number when you travel. Once you are at your destination,  
you can call your TalkSwitch location, let it ring twice and hang up.  
TalkSwitch will call you back.  
Prompted Call Back lets you change the call back number and message  
each time you initiate the call back. If you are traveling to more than  
one destination, or you don't know the telephone number, you can  
change the call back number once you arrive at your destination.  
How it works  
1. From your out-of-office location, dial one of the call back telephone  
numbers that you have pre-configured on your TalkSwitch unit.  
Figure 97: Dial your own number  
Any phone  
anywhere  
TalkSwitch  
Dial your own phone number  
in your office  
9 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Let the line ring at least once, but no more than three times and hang  
up. Make sure there is no auto attendant configured to answer after less  
than 3 rings on this line.  
3. Within less than 10 seconds, TalkSwitch will dial your auto call back  
number. When you pick up, your recorded message will play.  
Figure 98: TalkSwitch calling back  
Any phone  
TalkSwitch  
TalkSwitch calls you back  
in your office  
anywhere  
#
4. Accept the call by pressing  
. Enter your password. This confirms to  
TalkSwitch that you are an authorized user and enables call access  
through the TalkSwitch.  
5. You will now hear a generic TalkSwitch auto attendant. You may access  
your phone system as if you were in the office. Dial 9 for an outside line  
and make a long-distance call using your office long-distance plan, listen  
to your voicemail or transfer to a local extension.  
Figure 99: Multiple calls to anywhere  
Any phone  
Make multiple calls to  
anywhere in the world  
anywhere  
or  
Dial any  
extension  
Access any  
mailbox  
or  
2.5.1 Auto call back  
The TalkSwitch call back/call bridge feature gives you access to your office-  
based long-distance savings plan from anywhere around the world.  
Before call back is activated, all the call back settings must be configured.  
To use auto call back, dial your office telephone number, let the call ring  
twice and hang up.  
You can configure four auto call back numbers.  
1. Select Call Back/Call Bridge -> Auto Call Back.  
2. Select Call Back 1. You can add more as needed.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
9 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Click the checkbox next to Activate Auto Call Back 1. In the field Number  
to call back:, enter the call back number exactly as you would normally  
dial the number. Do not enter a line hunt group in the dialing string.  
4. Click the checkbox next to Use dialing prefix:, if you have to dial the  
same prefix every time you use auto call back (i.e. long-distance calling  
card number). Enter the dialing prefix including any required pauses or  
#
feature keys like  
or  
. Use a comma to insert a 2-second pause.  
*
Example: If you want to disable call waiting and want to dial a long-  
distance prefix before dialing the long-distance number, enter the  
following: *70,1010555,,. This corresponds to  
70 for disabling the  
*
call waiting feature, a 2-second pause to wait for the new dial tone,  
1010555 for the long distance prefix, and a 4-second pause to wait for  
the new dial tone before dialing the long-distance phone number.  
Use Announced Message:  
We recommend this option if the number TalkSwitch calls back is to a  
hotel or a location where a third party answers the call. The Announced  
Message option allows you to record a message that plays when the call is  
initially answered during a call back.  
Example: “Please transfer this call to Bob in room 307. The announced  
message can be recorded locally using an extension handset, or remotely  
by accessing call back from the auto attendant. The Record Message  
button gives the following instructions:  
5. Pick up a telephone handset connected to the unit and use the keypad  
commands to record the announced message.  
#
a) Press  
on an analog phone, or  
55 on a IP set to enter  
*
command mode. Enter the password if required.  
b) Enter the appropriate command as listed below.  
For auto call back  
1
Record message  
Play message back  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
61  
62  
63  
64  
71  
72  
73  
74  
2
3
4
There are four auto call back accounts per unit. If you need to record an  
announced message for a particular auto call back account, it must be on  
the same unit as the account.  
1 0 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you need to configure and/or record an announced message from a  
remote location and do not have the auto attendant set up to answer this  
call back line, you can call your call back number and let it ring 15 times.  
A generic auto attendant will answer. You can then configure call back by  
pressing 6.  
6. In the field next to Number used to trigger Auto Call Back:, enter the  
home/office number that you will call to trigger the auto call back. The  
drop-down list allows you to select any of the telephone lines connected  
to your unit.  
Figure 100: Configuring auto call back  
7. To prevent unauthorized use of your call back feature, click the checkbox  
next to Use password on Call Back and enter a password.  
8. Click the checkbox next to Allow Call Bridge, to allow call bridge after a  
call back has been accepted. You may restrict the call bridge line access  
by selecting the Hunt Group Access button. Call bridge is enabled when  
call back is activated with the same password you entered at the auto  
attendant.  
#
#
For a 2-second pause, dial  
0 and for a  
, dial  
. When you  
*
*
#
have completed the entire dial string, press  
.
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 0 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5.2 Prompted call back  
Prompted call back works much the same way as auto call back, except that  
you can change the call back number remotely. The call back number is  
stored in TalkSwitch until you change it. This means that you can change  
your call back telephone number and message each time you activate call  
back.  
If you are travelling to a location where you do not yet know the phone  
number, you can use prompted call back to save on your long-distance  
charges. For details on using call back, see 3.11.2 Using call back on  
You need to activate prompted call back before you can use this feature.  
The call back out of the system to the number programmed always uses  
the same line that was dialed.  
Figure 101: Configuring prompted call back  
1. Select Call Back/Call Bridge -> Prompted Call Back.  
2. Click the checkbox next to Activate Prompted Call Back.  
3. Enter the number TalkSwitch will call (e.g. your hotel telephone  
number). If you require a dialing prefix or long-distance discounts, check  
the Use dialing prefix box and enter the prefix.  
4. If you expect the call back from TalkSwitch to be answered by a  
receptionist before it gets to you, you can have the unit play a recorded  
announcement when someone answers the call back. This is useful if you  
need the call transferred to a hotel room. The message could say: “This is  
a call for Bob in room 587. Please transfer the call.  
1 0 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When you access prompted call back from out of the office, you may  
change this number before initiating the call back. The benefit of  
prompted call back is that you do not need to set the number before you  
leave the office.  
Accessing and using prompted call back from a telephone  
1. Dial your office telephone number.  
2. At the auto attendant, dial 6 to access the call back settings.  
3. Follow the prompts.  
a) Enter the telephone number where you would like TalkSwitch to call  
you.  
b) Record an announced message if required. Call back is activated right  
after you initiate prompted call back and hang up. A small initial  
long-distance charge is incurred at your current location when you  
activate prompted call back.  
#
Press  
on an analog phone or  
55 on a IP set to enter  
*
command mode. Enter the password if required.  
Enter the command as listed below.  
To record a message:  
To play the message:  
#
#
65  
75  
The call back number shown is always the last number the unit dials in  
the last prompted call back session.  
2.5.3 Call bridge  
Call bridge allows you to use the TalkSwitch phone lines to make outbound  
calls or transfers to local and remote office extensions. It gives you access to  
your office-based long-distance savings plan from anywhere around the  
world. You will first need to call into the unit from an outside phone  
number.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 0 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 102: Activating call bridge  
How to use call bridge:  
1. Call into the system from any out-of-office telephone.  
2. At the auto attendant message, dial a hunt group you are authorized to  
use (9 is default).  
#
3. Enter the password and press  
to access a TalkSwitch telephone line.  
Each TalkSwitch unit has four password activated call bridge accounts.  
4. At this point, you can dial a number the same way as from the office.  
Each account can be configured to allow access to certain hunt groups  
when using call bridge.  
Figure 103: Hunt group access  
To activate an account, check the Activate Call  
Bridge box and enter a 4- to 8-digit password.  
Click the Hunt Group Access button and assign  
the hunt groups for this account.  
Line hunt group 80 is used for Same Line  
Connect. To enable line hunt group 80, click the  
checkbox next to Allow the use of Same Line  
Connect [by dialing 80].  
1 0 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6 OPTIONS  
2.6.1 Permissions  
You can grant permissions to selected extensions to access outside lines.  
To add permissions for users:  
1. Select Options -> Permissions.  
2. Click in the checkboxes next to the extensions that are permitted access.  
3. Click Add User... See Figure 105 on page 106 and Figure 106 on  
Figure 104: Permissions to access outside line  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 0 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Figure 105: Add user  
4. Select a user fron the list or enter the name of the user in the  
Name: field.  
5. Assign a unique 4- to 8-digit access code in the Access Code: field.  
To remove a user from the permissions list:  
1. Select the user and click Remove.  
To modfy a user’s name or access code:  
1. Select the user and click Modify.  
Figure 106: Modify user access  
2. Modify the Name: and/or Access Code: fields as needed.  
3. Click OK.  
1 0 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2.6.2 Audio Controls  
This section deals with the adjustment of volume and system gain controls.  
All the controls on this page update the unit in real time. This allows you to  
adjust levels during a conversation without having to first save the  
configuration to the unit.  
Figure 107: Adjusting audio controls  
Line Controls  
If you need to adjust the volume of conversations through the system, you  
can adjust each line individually. The default settings compensate for loss  
created by TalkSwitch and a portion of the loss created by your lines. We  
recommend that you adjust the level for each line separately, as the  
characteristics of each line may vary. These controls only affect the volume  
heard by the caller.  
Extension Controls  
These controls allow you to increase or decrease the volume level of calls  
and system prompts heard at each extension.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 0 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2.6.3 Transfer Options  
This section describes the TalkSwitch actions when calls are transferred  
manually.  
Figure 108: Transfer options  
Transferring a caller to a local or remote extension or a ring group  
You can specify how transferred calls are handled if their target is a local  
extension, remote extension or ring group. If the extension is busy or  
doesn‘t answer, you have the choice to have the unit ring back the  
extension that transferred the call or perform the no answer or busy action  
of the extension that the call was intended for. Any changes made in this  
section affect the entire system.  
Transferring from a home phone  
You can transfer a call from a phone connected in parallel to one of the  
incoming TalkSwitch lines.  
Example: You can transfer a call from your home phone (for a home-based  
business) to a local or remote extension, ring group, an announcement or a  
voice mailbox.  
This section allows you to choose which transfer prefix you would like to use  
to perform the action. The transfer prefix wakes up TalkSwitch and is  
considered the equivalent of the Flash or Link action at a local extension.  
The default prefix is  
.
* *  
1 0 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Example: You receive a call on a phone in your home that is not a  
TalkSwitch extension and you want to transfer the caller to remote  
extension 215. You dial  
hang up. TalkSwitch now handles the call.  
, wait for the double beep, dial 215 and  
* *  
Transfer and clear  
TalkSwitch has the ability to clear lines after a call has been transferred.  
Ensure you have this service/feature activated on your line(s). Check under  
System Information -> Telephone Lines.  
Remote transfer  
Calls that are transferred to a remote or VoIP extension can be transferred  
back to another extension or voice mailbox.  
1. Dial  
to place the caller on hold.  
* *  
2. Enter the extension or mailbox number. If the extension is set to  
screening calls, dial  
cancel the transfer, dial  
transfer, the call is automatically transferred and the line is released once  
4 to complete the transfer. If you want to  
* *  
5. If you have selected Perform a blind  
* *  
the extension or mailbox number has been entered.  
When a call is transferred from one remote extension to another remote  
extension or VoIP extension, it is always a blind transfer so that the three  
lines are not tied up.  
This feature can only be used when forwarding a call to a remote  
extension or a VoIP location over two lines. It cannot be used with  
3-way calling or Centrex transfer services.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 0 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6.4 Miscellaneous  
All of the following options affect TalkSwitch as a system. Adjust them  
according to your needs.  
Figure 109: Miscellaneous  
Caller in queue reminder  
When a caller is in queue at an extension that is already in use, a reminder  
tone plays at the extension to let them know they have a caller in their  
queue. You can turn this function off by clicking the Off radio button.  
Call Back ring return  
You can adjust the number of rings during a call back session before  
TalkSwitch disconnects from call back. Depending on the situation, you may  
want to give yourself more time to pick up and accept the call back by  
increasing the number of rings.  
If being used with another PBX  
PBX extension length  
If TalkSwitch is used as an auto attendant with another PBX, you can set the  
number of digits the PBX uses for its extensions. This allows TalkSwitch to  
know what digits to pass on to the PBX to complete the transfer.  
This feature only works with PBXs that use hook flash as a transfer  
method. Please contact your PBX manufacturer for transfer details.  
1 1 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting up TalkSwitch behind an existing PBX  
1. Connect the PBX extension to one of the TalkSwitch line jacks. You may  
do this with all your TalkSwitch lines (1 PBX extension per line)  
depending upon how many auto attendant ports you would like on  
the PBX.  
2. Configure incoming calls on your PBX to ring the extensions you have  
allocated to the TalkSwitch lines.  
3. Configure the TalkSwitch auto attendants to answer after a specified  
number of rings.  
4. Record your auto attendants. They should list the extensions with the  
digit 7 in front of them.  
Example: If you have chosen the PBX extension length to be 3 digits and  
John Smith’s extension is 111 on the PBX, the auto attendant should say:  
“To speak with John Smith, press 7111…”. When 7111 is dialed, TalkSwitch  
puts the caller on hold and transfers the caller to extension 111.  
Intercom Calls  
This setting is enabled by default. Any internal call follows the cascade  
settings of the extension dialed. If it is disabled, no fall-through actions  
take place.  
Fax Over IP  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA supports fax detection and switching to G.711 for  
transparent fax over IP.  
Internal clock setting  
TalkSwitch can obtain time information from Caller ID for its internal clock.  
If you have indicated that you do have Caller ID on any of the lines, this  
option defaults to the active position. If it is de-activated, TalkSwitch  
obtains the time information from the time and date set in the Mode tab  
under Automatic Mode Switching. The TalkSwitch clock information is used  
for automatic mode scheduling and for internal Caller ID information when  
intercom calls are placed in the office.  
Internal Caller ID options  
TalkSwitch can display name and number Caller ID to each extension during  
intercom calls. If your Caller ID unit/telephone does not support the name  
option, you can have TalkSwitch send the number only.  
Audio Output Options  
TalkSwitch can output different audio to the PA jack. The default setting is  
to play only PA announcements through the PA jack by dialing  
any extension.  
0 from  
*
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other options include:  
Voicemail Screening (used in a home environment)  
Demo with a router (used for demonstrating the product)  
Static VoIP Demo (used strictly for demonstrating two TalkSwitch CVA  
units connected to a hub or a switch and acting as two separate  
locations.  
Auto Attendant Transfer Prompts  
TalkSwitch can disable playing of transfer prompts to callers when  
redirecting calls from the auto attendant.  
SIP Server Registration  
Select the Re-registration Interval between 2 and 60 minutes from the drop-  
down list. The re-registration interval on your IP phones may differ, but  
TalkSwitch will use the time specified here. See Figure 109 on page 110.  
2.6.5 Troubleshooting  
Do not change the following controls unless you are familiar with the effect  
they have on the TalkSwitch operation. If your system does not appear to be  
functioning properly, please contact your dealer for assistance.  
Figure 110: Troubleshooting  
Flash lengths  
Accepted Flash length:  
These options control the flash length allowed from a local extension  
that TalkSwitch considers to be an intentional flash. The range can be  
adjusted to accept anything from 300 ms to 1 second. The default range  
for accepting a flash signal at a local extension is between 400 ms and  
800 ms. Most phones emit a 600 ms flash signal when the Flash or Link  
button is pressed.  
1 1 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transmitted Flash length:  
This option controls the transmitted flash length from TalkSwitch to the  
telephone company lines. TalkSwitch emits a Flash when forwarding or  
bridging calls using the 3-Way Calling/Conference or Centrex transfer  
service or when transferring calls through an existing PBX system. The  
value can be adjusted from 250 ms to 1 second. The default setting is  
400 ms. If you notice that you are having problems with any of the  
TalkSwitch features that use 3-way calling, experiment with this value.  
Double Flash time  
When two flashes are detected, TalkSwitch needs to calculate the time  
between the flashes to establish if they were intended to propagate a flash  
at the central office (CO) or to place a call on hold and then quickly retrieve  
it. The Double Flash time values signify the maximum time between two  
flashes that TalkSwitch recognizes as an intended flash to the CO. When two  
flashes are detected with a time gap larger than the value displayed, no  
flash is propagated at the CO. The value can be adjusted from 200 ms to 2000  
ms with the default set at 1200 ms.  
3-Way Calling wait time  
This option adjusts the time required between hook flash and a dial string.  
Some telephone company 3-way calling/conference services require  
different time allowances after the flash signal to re-establish a dial tone.  
The default time is two seconds, so TalkSwitch can let the lines settle after  
going off-hook before sending the DTMF digits.  
Ring Patterns  
Click the Check Ring Pattern... button and call any extension. After three  
rings the sequence of the ring pattern displays in a new window. The time is  
displayed in milliseconds.  
Non-detection of disconnect-clear  
This option controls the length of time after which TalkSwitch drops a line  
when silence is heard. This safeguard is useful when a telephone line does  
not send out the disconnect-clear signal that tells TalkSwitch the call is  
completed.  
Auto Attendant Adjustments  
Since TalkSwitch allows callers to dial 100, 200, 300 series extensions, 400  
series mailboxes and allows fall-through options for the single digits 1, 2, 3,  
4 and 5 at the auto attendant, there needs to be a time limit on how long  
TalkSwitch waits for another digit before following the single-digit option  
after the first digit is pressed. There are three ways to make use of this  
control. Be careful not to isolate your callers from having both choices as  
listed in (1).  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. With the current setting, callers can dial any local extension or remote  
extension or ring group, as long as the second digit is pressed within 1.5  
seconds of pressing the first digit. Callers can press 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. When  
TalkSwitch detects no second digit after 1.5 seconds, it follows the  
programmed option for that auto attendant.  
2. If you don’t want to use options 1, 2, and 3 for any of the auto  
attendants, you can set the option to 4 seconds. This gives callers  
enough time to dial all three digits of any extension without accidentally  
falling through to one of the auto attendant options.  
3. If you don’t want to give callers the ability to dial any of the extensions  
and only permit them to access single-digit options, set this value to  
immediately. As soon as TalkSwitch detects the first digit, it will follow  
the specified option for that auto attendant.  
Auto Route Selection  
The Inter-Digit time-out can be set anywhere between 3 and 18 seconds. The  
default is 5 seconds.  
2.6.5.1 Troubleshooting — Advanced  
DTMF Detection  
Should callers complain about being misdirected when they select options at  
the auto attendant, the following values need to be adjusted:  
Minimum required time to detect a DTMF digit:  
The default setting of 45 ms is adequate for most environments. It may be  
necessary to lower this value if TalkSwitch appears to have trouble hearing  
digits when dialed at the auto attendant. Increase the time if the system is  
accidentally misdirecting callers.  
Minimum required time between DTMF digits:  
The default setting of 65 ms is adequate for most environments. If there is a  
problem, increase the value slightly to help the system deal with echoed  
digits from cell phones.  
Example: Calls keep being misdirected to extension 111. This usually  
indicates that, even though the caller may have dialed 113, TalkSwitch sees  
1113 because the 1 was echoed by the cell phone network. Once TalkSwitch  
captures 3 digits, it ignores the rest, hence the digits 111 are accepted and  
the 3 is ignored.  
1 1 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 111: Troubleshooting advanced  
Line CPC/Disconnect Clear  
If calls are accidentally disconnected in mid conversation, it usually  
indicates a problem with the telephone line. TalkSwitch is always looking  
for a hang-up signal, called a CPC or Disconnect Clear signal, from the phone  
company. If the line has power fluctuations or if the line card at the central  
office is defective, CPC signals in the 250 ms range might come down the  
line and cause TalkSwitch to hang up. Try increasing this value to correct  
the problem.  
Ringback Control  
If an extension seems to ring back as if a caller was on hold, but when  
answered, no one is there, it could indicate a debounce problem with the  
phone hook switch. When someone at the extension hangs up, the handset  
bounces slightly to cause a flash signal that can be seen by TalkSwitch  
before the hang-up. As a result, TalkSwitch puts the line on hold. To help  
with this problem, increase this value until it stops ringing back.  
Fax Detection  
If fax calls are not directed to the fax machine, you may need to set this  
option to Detect 1 tone. If it is set to Detect 1 tone and people complain they  
have accidentally been routed to the fax machine, set this value to  
Detect 2 tones.  
T A L K S W I T C H C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
1 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VoIP Ports  
IP Signalling Port:  
The default IP signalling port is 5060. If you need to choose another  
port, enter a value between 1024 and 16556.  
Starting RTP Port:  
The starting RTP port for TalkSwitch is 6000. From this starting point,  
TalkSwitch needs 4 ports for each TalkSwitch unit. RTP ports are evenly  
numbered from the start port. 6000, 6002, 6004 and 6006 are needed for  
the first TalkSwitch unit on a LAN and 6030, 6032, 6034 and 6036 are  
used for the fourth unit.  
These are the ports that this TalkSwitch system listens on as opposed to the  
port it needs to communicate with at the other end.  
Example: If your IP server at another location uses port 5061 instead of  
5060 for signalling, you do not set this port to 5061, you need to include  
the port number in the address specified in the VoIP Configuration section  
of the software.  
Example: Proxy Server Name: 222.234.432.234:5061  
1 1 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R 3  
CHAPTER 3: USING TALKSWITCH  
USING TALKSWITCH  
3.1 IN THE OFFICE — RECEIVING CALLS WITH OR  
WITHOUT THE AUTO ATTENDANT  
3.1.1 Receiving calls using the auto attendant  
If you don’t have a receptionist, the auto attendant helps you handle all  
your inbound calls. Once an auto attendant has been configured and  
recorded, it will follow the instructions given in the configuration. For  
details on adding and configuring auto attendants, see 2.4.2 Auto attendant  
on page 80 and its subsections.  
When calls are answered by an auto attendant, callers can:  
Dial any local or remote extension  
Dial any VoIP number (250–299)  
Dial any ring group (300–309)  
Dial voicemail directly  
Use a dial-by-name directory  
Choose options 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (if configured to perform specific actions)  
Transmit a fax  
Go to a different auto attendant  
Remain on the line to follow an action programmed for that auto  
attendant  
TalkSwitch owners and employees can access other options at the auto  
attendant:  
Call back or call bridge  
Retrieve voicemail  
Enter command mode to make system changes  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
All these features can be password-protected to avoid unauthorized access.  
TalkSwitch also provides the option of ringing specific extensions or ring  
groups prior to the engagement of an auto attendant. For details about  
configuring auto attendants, see 2.4.2 Auto attendant on page 80.  
3.1.2 Receiving calls without the auto attendant  
If you do not use the auto attendant to answer calls, please note that the  
call cascade options for the local extensions are not engaged. For calls to go  
to an extension’s mailbox, the call must be transferred manually by someone  
in the office. Once calls have been answered at a local extension, they can  
be transferred to any extension or voice mailbox.  
3.2 IN THE OFFICE — MAKING AND RECEIVING CALLS  
USING AN ANALOG PHONE  
If you are using an IP phone, see 3.3 In the Office — Making and receiving  
calls using an IP phone on page 126 and following pages. The difference  
between a regular and an IP phone is the size of the jack. Regular phones  
use regular, RJ-11 phone cables. IP phones take RJ-45 (Cat 5) cables for  
networking.  
3.2.1 Making calls from a local extension without direct line access  
Place intercom calls from one local extension to another local  
extension, remote extension or extension ring group  
You can place intercom calls from one local extension to another local,  
remote or VoIP extension or to a ring group.  
1. Pick up your extension’s handset.  
2. Dial the number of the extension you want to intercom to. An intercom  
call is identified by two short rings.  
1 1 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Exceptions: For a remote extension intercom call, the phone rings as  
usual. If a ring group has a different ring pattern, intercom calls follow  
the cascade settings of the extension dialed. You can enable this feature  
in the configuration software under Options -> Miscellaneous.  
You can perform intercom paging and activate the speakerphone at other  
local extensions that have TS-80, TS-200, TS-400 or TS-600 phones. To  
place an intercom call to one of these phones, dial  
extension at the TalkSwitch dial tone.  
84 and the local  
*
Place out-of-office calls from a local extension  
1. Press 9 or 8188 to choose a hunt group at the internal dial tone. This  
hunt group gives you access to an available line to dial out.  
2. If your system requires permissions for outgoing calls, enter your  
access code.  
3. Dial the phone number.  
Restrictions  
You can set restrictions to specific hunt groups for each extension. Your  
extension can also be configured to access a line directly. When you pick up  
a handset, you hear the telephone company dial tone and can dial an  
outside number as usual.  
If you have Direct Line Access enabled for a local extension, you need to  
dial Flash before dialing local extensions or voice mailboxes.  
If you dial your own extension you will be directed to your voicemail. If  
your voicemail is not set up, you will get a busy signal.  
3.2.2 Receiving calls at a local extension  
The steps below apply when a regular extension is ringing. If an auto  
attendant engages before you are able to pick up, the caller can select an  
option at the auto attendant.  
1. Pick up the extension’s handset.  
2. If the call went through the auto attendant and call screening is enabled  
in Call Handling -> Local extension and Extension Ring Groups:  
#
a) Press  
b) Press  
to accept the call.  
to re-route the call to its extension‘s call cascade options.  
*
c) Hang up.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can intercept a call that is ringing at any other local extension.  
1. Pick up your handset.  
2. At the TalkSwitch internal dial tone, dial  
your local extension.  
9. This routes the call to  
*
You can answer a call ringing at a specific extension.  
1. If you know the extension that is ringing, dial  
7 and the extension  
*
number (i.e.  
7112 to pick up a call ringing at extension 112).  
*
2. If you are in the middle of a call and want to connect to another  
incoming caller, press Flash to place the first caller on hold.  
3. Dial  
9 or  
7 and the extension number to connect to the second  
*
*
caller.  
4. Once you are finished with the second call or would like to return to the  
first caller, press Flash 5.  
3.2.3 Placing calls on hold at a local extension  
Place calls on hold  
1. Press Flash (on the TalkSwitch TS-80, TS-200, TS-400 or TS-600 phones).  
2. Press Flash again to take callers off immediate hold.  
If you have multiple callers on hold or in queue at your extension, press  
Flash 7 to retrieve callers on a first in/first out basis.  
If you press Hold on a regular, analog phone, you won’t be able to access  
any of the TalkSwitch features while the caller is on hold. If you have  
music on hold enabled, the caller does not hear music while on hold.  
3.2.4 Transferring calls from an extension  
3.2.4.1 Unscreened transfer  
You can initiate an unscreened transfer from a local extension to another  
local extension, remote extension or extension ring group.  
1. Press Flash to put the caller on hold.  
2. Dial the extension you want to transfer to and hang up. The caller is  
taken off hold when the receiving extension answers. If the transferred  
call is busy or not answered after the number of rings specified in the No  
1 2 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Answer setting, or if the extension is busy, one of the following will  
happen:  
Default:  
Option:  
The transferred call is handled according to the destination  
extension’s No Answer or Busy settings.  
The call is transferred back to the transferring extension.  
The option can be altered under Options -> Transfer Options in the  
configuration software.  
3.2.4.2 Screened transfer  
You can initiate a screened transfer from a local extension to another local  
extension, remote extension or extension ring group.  
1. Press Flash to put the caller on hold and dial the appropriate extension  
number.  
a) If the person at the receiving extension wishes to take the call, hang  
up or dial Flash 4 to complete the transfer. The caller is immediately  
taken off hold and connected to the receiving extension. You hear an  
internal dial tone.  
b) If the person at the receiving extension does not wish to take the  
call, press Flash 5 to return to the caller.  
c) If you dial an extension that is busy or not answered, you can  
complete the transfer so that the call is routed according to that  
extension’s call cascade settings.  
If you handle many calls, you may want to complete or cancel a transfer  
without hanging up. Flash 4 will complete the transfer and provide an  
internal dial tone. Flash 5 cancels the transfer and connects you back to  
the caller.  
3.2.5 Transferring calls from a local extension to an external phone  
Unscreened Transfer  
1. Press Flash to put the caller on hold.  
2. Select a hunt group (dial 80 for Same Line Connect).  
3. Dial the outside telephone number.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Press Flash 4 to complete the transfer. Do not hang up to complete the  
transfer because this disconnects the call.  
Screened Transfer  
Instead of completing the transfer once you have dialed the outside  
number, wait until the call is answered and ask the recipient at the  
extension if he or she wishes to take the call. If the recipient accepts the  
call, press Flash 4 to complete the transfer, if not, press Flash 5 to return to  
the caller.  
If you have the 3-way calling/conference or a Centrex transfer feature  
enabled on the current line, select the Same Line Connect (80) to make  
use of these features. Everything proceeds as above on the same line the  
call came in.  
3.2.6 Parking and retrieving calls at a local extension  
Call park is a feature for placing a call on hold and then retrieving it from  
another local extension. TalkSwitch has 10 park orbits (500–509).  
3.2.6.1 Parking a call  
1. Press Flash and  
510. TalkSwitch selects the first available park orbit  
*
(500–509). If you use a TS-80, TS-200, TS-400 or TS-600 phone, press the  
Park button or softkey.  
2. You hear a confirmation indicating that the caller has been parked  
successfully and into which park orbit.  
3.2.6.2 Retrieving a parked call at another local extension  
The person who parked the call notifies the person at the extension for  
whom the call is parked (e.g. “Mary, there is a call parked for you in 500”).  
1. Press  
and the appropriate park orbit. If you use TS-80, TS-200,  
* *  
TS-400 or TS-600 phone, press the Un-park button or softkey and enter  
the park orbit. If Direct Line Access is enabled at the extension, you must  
press Flash first.  
If Direct Line Access is enabled at your extension, press Flash before  
retrieving the parked call.  
1 2 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.2.6.3 Using call park with the paging option  
If the external paging option is enabled on TalkSwitch, you may choose to  
announce a parked call over the PA system by pressing  
please pick up 501.”). This tells Mary that she can retrieve the parked call  
0. (e.g. “Mary,  
*
from any extension by pressing 501 at the dial tone.  
* *  
If Direct Line Access is enabled at your extension, press Flash before  
retrieving the parked call.  
If you have a combination of TS-80, TS-200, TS-400 and TS-600 phones in  
the office, you can page an individual extension or a ring group (i.e press  
85, the Page button or softkey and the extension or ring group  
number).  
*
3.2.7 Queuing and retrieving callers  
The following sections describe Uniform Call Distribution (UCD). This  
includes features like call queuing, call waiting, conference calling, etc.  
Call queue is a useful feature for placing multiple callers on hold at your  
extension while you are on an existing call. For details on configuring call  
queue, please refer to Call Handling in section 2.4.5 Call Cascade on page 90.  
3.2.7.1 Queuing calls to a single extension  
If an extension is busy and has queue call set for the Busy call cascade,  
incoming callers hear one of the prompts below, followed by music (if  
enabled) while they are on hold:  
If the call came from the auto attendant and the extension has a  
voice mailbox:  
“The extension you have reached is currently busy. If you wish to continue  
holding, please remain on the line. To leave a voicemail message, press 1, and  
to return to the main menu, press star.”  
If the call came from the auto attendant and the extension has no  
voice mailbox:  
“The extension you have reached is currently busy. If you wish to continue  
holding, please remain on the line. To return to the main menu, press star.”  
If the call was transferred from another extension and the extension  
has a voice mailbox, but there is no auto attendant on this line with a  
main menu to return to:  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
“The extension you have reached is currently busy. If you wish to continue  
holding, please remain on the line. To leave a voicemail message, press one.”  
If the call was transferred from another extension and the extension  
has no voice mailbox and there is no auto attendant on this line with a  
main menu to return to:  
“The extension you have reached is currently busy. If you wish to continue  
holding, please remain on the line.”  
While the caller is on hold at your extension, you hear a call waiting beep  
every 75 seconds. If you want to rotate through queued callers, dial Flash 7.  
The caller you are speaking to is placed on hold, and the first caller in the  
queue is retrieved. If you have multiple callers queued, press Flash 7 to  
retrieve callers on a first in/first out basis.  
If call waiting is enabled for the Busy action of a local extension, callers  
hear ringing (or music if enabled) while the local extension hears a call  
waiting beep and receives the caller ID for the new call. To connect to the  
new caller, press Flash 7. To let the caller fall through to the next level of  
the cascade, ignore the beep.  
3.2.7.2 Queuing callers to an extension ring group  
If you want to queue callers to a ring group, configure this action using an  
auto attendant. This feature is also referred to as automatic call  
distribution.  
Example: Configure auto attendant 1 to queue callers to ring group 301 for  
technical support if they have pressed 5. When a caller presses 5 for  
technical support, they enter the queue immediately. Every 60 seconds the  
caller hears the following prompt: “Your call is important to us. Please  
remain on the line. To return to the previous menu, press  
.” Extensions  
*
that are part of the ring group and are available will start ringing within 10  
seconds of hanging up the phone from a previous call. The delay allows time  
to make a new call or activate Do not Disturb as a log out option. After 5  
extension rings, it will ring once every 16 seconds. When you pick up, you  
hear a prompt that provides the option to accept the queued call by pressing  
#
or leave the caller in the queue by pressing  
and returning to the  
*
dial tone to make a new call.  
3.2.8 Using call waiting  
The call waiting feature is activated under Call Handling -> Local  
extensions in call cascade section of the Busy tab list (invoke Call Waiting).  
1 2 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
When the dialed local extension is busy, the caller hears ringing or music  
depending on the settings.  
If the phone supports call waiting caller ID (type II signaling), you hear a  
beep followed by a short blip. Depending on your phone, you may hear  
something similar to a modem noise. This is normal. During this  
notification, the caller ID information is displayed on the phone. The caller  
does not hear the beep. The phone mutes the other side.  
If the phone does not support call waiting and caller ID, you hear a beep.  
When the call waiting notification beep is heard, the person at the  
extension can dial Flash 7 to put the current caller on hold and answer the  
new caller. He or she has the option to dial Flash 5. This terminates the  
current call and connects to the new call. If the person at the extension  
does not want to take the new call, they can ignore the call waiting beeps  
and TalkSwitch directs the caller to the next level of the call cascade for  
that extension (i.e. send the caller to the associated voice mailbox).  
3.2.9 Conference calling  
You can set up conference calling between 3 local TalkSwitch extensions,  
two local extensions and one outside caller or two outside callers and one  
local extension.  
3.2.9.1 Two local TalkSwitch extensions and one outside caller  
You do not require access to the telephone company’s 3-way calling/  
conference service to use the TalkSwitch conference calling capabilities.  
1. Establish a call with an outside party.  
2. Press Flash to place the outside caller on hold. Dial the number of the  
local extension you wish to conference with.  
3. When the extension is picked up, press Flash 6 to establish the  
3-way call.  
3.2.9.2 Two outside callers and one local extension  
There are two different methods for this type of conference call. The first  
method is similar to the one above, using only TalkSwitch for the conference  
function.  
1. Establish a call with an outside party.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Place the outside caller on hold and dial the number of the other outside  
party. Dial 9 or another hunt group before dialing the second phone  
number unless you have Direct Line Access enabled.  
3. When the call is answered, press Flash 6 to establish the 3-way call.  
The second method uses the telephone company’s 3-way calling/conference  
service.  
1. Establish a call with an outside party.  
2. Press Flash 80 to place the outside caller on hold and dial the number of  
the other outside party.  
3. When the call is answered, press Flash 6 to establish the 3-way call.  
The conference initiator can disengage the second conferenced party at  
any time by pressing Flash 5.  
3.3 IN THE OFFICE — MAKING AND RECEIVING CALLS  
USING AN IP PHONE  
3.3.1 Making calls from a local IP extension (IP phone)  
Place intercom calls from one local extension to another local or remote  
extension or to a ring group  
An intercom call is usually identified by 2 short rings. The IP phones that we  
recommend support this distinctive ring feature. You can place intercom  
calls from one local extension to another local, remote, VoIP extension or  
ring group.  
1. Pick up your extension’s handset and dial the number of the extension  
you want to intercom.  
Exceptions: For a remote extension intercom call, the phone rings as  
usual. If a ring group has a different ring pattern, intercom calls follow  
the cascade settings of the extension dialed. You can enable this feature  
in the configuration software under Options -> Miscellaneous.  
You can perform intercom paging and activate the speakerphone at other  
local extensions that have TS-80, TS-200, TS-400 or TS-600 phones. To  
place an intercom call to one of these phones, dial  
84 and the local  
*
#
extension, then press Dial, Send or  
to place the call.  
1 2 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Place out-of-office calls from a local extension  
1. Dial 9 or 8188 to choose a hunt group and dial the phone number.  
#
2. Depending on your IP phone, press Dial, Send or  
.
You can set restrictions to specific hunt groups or block certain types of  
outbound calls. Your extension can also be configured to access a specific  
line directly.  
If Direct Line Access is enabled for a local IP extension, you need to  
press  
before dialing any extensions or voice mailbox.  
* *  
3.3.2 Receiving calls at a local IP extension  
If an auto attendant engages before you are able to pick up, the caller can  
select an option at the auto attendant. The steps below apply when you pick  
up an extension that is ringing.  
1. Pick up the extension’s handset.  
2. If the call went through the auto attendant and call screening is enabled  
in Call Handling -> Local Extension and Extension Ring Groups:  
#
a) Press  
to accept the call.  
b) Press  
or hang up to re-route the call to its extension call cascade  
*
options.  
#
c) press Dial, Send or  
.
You can intercept a call that is ringing on any other local extension.  
1. Pick up your handset.  
#
2. Dial  
9 and press Dial, Send or  
depending on your phone. This  
*
routes the call to your local extension.  
You can answer a call that is ringing at another extension.  
1. If you know which extension is ringing, dial 7 and the extension  
*
(i.e.  
7112 to pick up a call ringing at extension 112).  
*
#
2. Press Dial, Send or  
depending on your phone.  
3. If you are in the middle of a call and want to connect to another  
incoming caller, press Hold to place the first caller on hold.  
4. Dial  
9 or  
7 and the extension.  
*
*
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
#
5. To connect to the second caller, press Dial, Send or  
depending on  
your phone.  
6. Once you are finished with the second call or would like to return to the  
first caller, press Cancel (softkey).  
3.3.3 Hold and transfer  
3.3.3.1 Hold  
1. Press Hold.  
2. Press the flashing line key that corresponds to the caller on hold to take  
the caller off hold. If you have multiple callers on hold or in queue at  
your extension, you can retrieve them on a first in/first out basis.  
#
3. Press Hold and 7, then press Dial, Send or  
depending on your  
phone.  
3.3.3.2 Unscreened transfer  
1. Press the Transfer or xfer key.  
2. Dial the appropriate extension number and then press the Transfer or  
xfer key. Some IP phones may support hang-up transfer. Please check the  
documentation of the IP phone to see if it supports this feature.  
The caller is taken off hold when the receiving extension answers. If the  
transferred call is busy or not answered after the number of rings specified  
in the No Answer setting, or if the extension is busy, one of the following  
applies:  
Default:  
Option:  
The transferred call is handled according to the destination  
extension’s No Answer or Busy settings.  
The call is transferred back to the transferring extension.  
The option can be altered under Options -> Transfer Options in the  
configuration software.  
3.3.3.3 Screened transfer  
To initiate a screened transfer from an IP extension to another local  
extension, remote extension or extension ring group:  
1 2 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Press Transfer or xfer to put the caller on hold.  
2. Dial the appropriate extension number.  
a) If the person at the receiving extension wishes to take the call, press  
Transfer or xfer to complete the transfer. Some IP phones may  
support hang-up transfer. Please check the documentation of the IP  
phone to see if it supports this feature. The caller is immediately  
taken off hold and connected to the receiving extension.  
b) If the person at the receiving extension does not wish to take the  
call, press Cancel. If this softkey is unavailable, press the flashing  
line button that corresponds to the caller on hold to return to the  
caller.  
c) If you dial an extension that is busy or not answered, you can  
complete the transfer and the caller is directed according to that  
extension’s call cascade settings.  
3.3.3.4 Transfer from a IP extension to any outside number  
Unscreened Transfer  
1. Press Transfer or xfer to put the caller on hold.  
2. Dial a hunt group (or 80 for Same Line Connect) and the outside  
telephone number. If Direct Line Access is enabled, dial the phone  
number without a prefix.  
3. Press Transfer or xfer to complete the transfer. Do not hang up to  
complete the transfer because this disconnects the call. Some IP phones  
may support hang-up transfer. Please check the documentation for the IP  
phone to see if it supports this feature.  
Screened Transfer  
If the person at the receiving extension does not wish to take the call:  
4. Press Cancel or the flashing line button that corresponds to the call  
on hold to return to the caller.  
If you have the 3-way calling/conference or the Centrex transfer feature  
enabled on the current line, select the Same Line Connect (80) to make  
use of these features. Everything proceeds as above on the same line the  
call came in.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.3.4 Call park — Parking and retrieving callers  
Call park is a feature for placing a call on hold and then retrieving it from  
any other local extension. TalkSwitch has 10 park orbits, 500–509.  
3.3.4.1 Parking a caller  
#
1. Press Transfer or xfer,  
510 and press Dial or  
to place a caller  
*
in the next available park orbit.  
2. You will hear a confirmation indicating that the caller has been parked  
successfully and into which park orbit.  
3.3.4.2 Retrieving a parked call  
1. Press  
and the park orbit.  
* *  
#
2. Press Dial or  
then  
. If Direct Line Access is enabled at the extension, dial  
and the park orbit, then press Dial, Send or  
* *  
* *  
#
.
3.3.4.3 Using call park with the paging option  
If the external paging option is enabled on TalkSwitch, you can announce  
the call over the PA system by pressing  
0. If Direct Line Access is  
*
enabled, dial  
0 and announce that there is a call parked in a  
* * *  
specific park orbit for a co-worker.  
Example: “Bob, please pick up 501.” This tells Bob that he can retrieve the  
parked call from any extension by pressing  
The caller is now connected to Bob at that extension. If Direct Line Access  
501 at the dial tone.  
* *  
is enabled at your extension, press Flash before retrieving the parked call.  
If you have a combination of TS-80, TS-200, TS-400 and TS-600 phones in  
the office, you can page an individual extension or a ring group (i.e press  
85, the Page button or softkey and the extension or ring group  
number).  
*
3.3.5 Queuing and retrieving callers  
For details on queuing and retrieving callers from a IP extension, please  
refer to sections 3.2.7, 3.2.7.1 and 3.2.7.2. This feature is used the same way  
1 3 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
on analog and IP phones except for the slight differences outlined in the  
next paragraph.  
Some IP phones display a notification on the screen while the caller is on  
hold at your extension. If you want to rotate through queued callers while  
#
you are on the phone, dial 7 and press Dial, Send or  
. The caller you are  
speaking to is placed on hold, and the first caller in the queue is retrieved.  
#
If several callers are queued, dial 7 and press Dial, Send or  
to retrieve  
them on a first in/first out basis.  
3.3.6 Using the TalkSwitch call waiting feature  
If the call waiting feature is activated as a Busy option in the call cascade  
routing for a local extension and the dialed extension is in use, the caller  
hears ringing or music depending on the music on hold settings. The person  
at the extension hears the following:  
If the phone supports call waiting caller ID (type II signaling), you hear a  
beep followed by a short blip. Depending on your phone, you may hear  
something similar to a modem noise. This is normal. During this  
notification, the caller ID information is displayed on the phone. The  
caller does not hear the beep. The phone mutes the other side.  
If the phone does not support call waiting caller ID, you hear a beep.  
When the call waiting notification beep is heard, the person at the  
extension can pick up another line and dial 7 and press Dial, Send or  
#
to put the current caller on hold and answer the new caller. To  
return to the previous call, press the flashing line key that corresponds  
to the previous call. On most IP phones, this will put the current call on  
hold and connect to the other caller.  
To terminate the current call and go back to the other caller on hold,  
hang up, then go off-hook and press the button that corresponds to the  
flashing line of the caller on hold. If the person at the extension does  
not want to take the new call, she or he can ignore the call waiting beeps  
and TalkSwitch directs the caller to the next level of the call cascade for  
that extension (i.e. send the caller to the associated voice mailbox).  
3.3.7 Conference calling with TalkSwitch  
3.3.7.1 Two TalkSwitch local extensions and one outside caller  
You do not require access to the telephone company’s 3-way calling/  
conference service to use the TalkSwitch conference calling capabilities.  
1. Establish a call with an outside party.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Press Conf or Hold to place the outside caller on hold. Dial the local  
extension you wish to conference with.  
3. When the extension answers, press Conf to establish the 3-way call.  
3.3.7.2 Two outside callers and one local extension  
There are two different methods for this type of conference call. The first  
method is similar to the one above, using only TalkSwitch for the conference  
function.  
1. Establish a call with an outside party.  
2. Press Conf or Hold to place the outside caller on hold.  
3. Pick up another line and dial the number of the other outside party.  
Dial 9 or another hunt group before dialing the second phone number.  
4. When the call is answered, press Conf to establish the 3-way call.  
The second method uses the telephone company’s 3-way calling/conference  
service.  
1. Establish a call with an outside party.  
2. Press Conf to place the outside caller on hold.  
3. At the dial tone, enter 80, dial the number of the other outside party  
#
and press Dial, Send or  
.
4. When the call is answered, press Conf to establish the 3-way call.  
3.4 MAKING AND RECEIVING CALLS USING VOIP  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA supports inter-branch connectivity via PSTN and VoIP.  
Once the system is properly configured, calls made between locations are  
using VoIP with broadband connections. TalkSwitch has 50 VoIP location  
codes (250-299) that can be assigned to any VoIP number. These location  
codes are dialed from an extension or from an auto attendant. TalkSwitch  
automatically finds the VoIP ports for placing these calls.  
Other calls are made over VoIP by dialing hunt group 88. Activate VoIP  
numbers in this hunt group first. Dialing 88 at the internal dial tone tells  
TalkSwitch to hunt all VoIP numbers for an available line. In order to reach a  
remote location, a VoIP phone number has to be assigned to the VoIP  
number you want to call.  
1 3 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Example: You have 3 branch locations (New York, Miami, San Jose), all with  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA units.  
Location 1: New York  
Phone numbers assigned to 4 VoIP lines: 250-261 (12 phone numbers)  
Location 2: Miami  
Phone numbers assigned to 4 VoIP lines: 270-273 (4 phone numbers)  
Location 3: San Jose  
Phone numbers assigned to 4 VoIP lines: 280-283 (4 phone numbers)  
If someone in the New York office wants to reach someone in the Miami  
office, they can dial one of the phone numbers associated to Miami  
(270-273). TalkSwitch automatically finds an available VoIP number and  
connects to the Miami location. The TalkSwitch at the Miami location  
handles the call according to the configuration in the Call Handling  
section for the VoIP numbers.  
3.5 USING REGULAR OR IP PHONES CONNECTED  
IN PARALLEL TO TALKSWITCH  
Phones connected in parallel (not connected to TalkSwitch but connected to  
the same line) with TalkSwitch always ring at least once before TalkSwitch  
starts ringing its extensions or the auto attendant answers the call.  
TalkSwitch uses the first ring to identify the incoming ring pattern before  
passing it on to the extensions or the auto attendant (TalkSwitch  
determines if the call is a distinctive ring and detects any caller ID  
information). A parallel phone can interrupt a telephone call on any of the  
TalkSwitch lines.  
Making and receiving calls on phones connected in parallel  
to TalkSwitch  
Make calls on parallel-connected phones as if TalkSwitch were not sharing  
the telephone line with them.  
If you answer on a parallel-connected phone before the auto attendant  
engages, TalkSwitch takes no further action. If a call is answered on a  
parallel-connected phone after the auto attendant engages, you can turn off  
the auto attendant message by pressing  
extensions, or let it time-out on its own, in which case you will hear:  
0 at one of the TalkSwitch  
* *  
”Good-bye”.  
Transferring calls on parallel-connected phones  
Calls answered on a parallel-connected phone can be transferred to any  
TalkSwitch extension or voice mailbox. To transfer the caller, press  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
. After you hear 2 beeps, dial the extension and hang up. You  
cannot announce a caller to the transferred extension but if you stay on the  
line, you are in a conference call state. You can hang up at any time.  
* *  
If you transfer a call from a parallel-connected phone and then hang up, the  
extension rings the number of times specified for that extension. If it is not  
answered within that number of rings, the call is handled according to that  
extension’s call cascade actions.  
When a phone in parallel with TalkSwitch is off-hook, you notice that the  
corresponding line light flickers to indicate the line is busy. TalkSwitch does  
not allow extensions to interfere on a call that has the line in use.  
#
You can change the transfer prefix to  
instead of  
if the  
*
* *  
default prefix conflicts with another device or service. To change the  
transfer prefix, open the configuration software and change the setting  
in the Options -> Transfer Options window.  
3.6 MODEMS AND TELEPHONE LINE ACCESS  
If your modem is attached to TalkSwitch as an extension, you can configure  
it to access your telephone lines in one of two ways.  
1. Enable Direct Line Access to one of your telephone lines. You don’t have  
to dial 9 or any other hunt group to access an outside line at the  
extension where your modem is conneted. Your modem will work the  
same way it always has. You don’t have to change your dial-up settings  
on page 44 for more details on configuring Direct Line Access.  
2. If you use a telephone and modem on the same extension, do not enable  
Direct Line Access. A TalkSwitch extension with Direct Line Access  
immediately connects to one of your lines when you pick up the  
telephone’s handset, preventing you from accessing other system  
features without first pressing Flash on an analog phone or  
a IP phone.  
on  
* *  
You can have your modem access a specific line using a hunt group.  
Change your modem’s dial properties to include the intended hunt group  
(9 or 8188) followed by the letter w, before the dial-up networking  
telephone number (e.g. 9w789-1234). The letter w after your dial-out  
access number tells your modem to dial the access number 9, wait until it  
detects a dial tone, and then dial your dial-up networking number.  
1 3 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If your modem has problems dialing out, use a comma (,) to create a 2  
second pause instead of the w (wait for dial tone).  
Because TalkSwitch CA and CVA units are digital systems, modem calls will  
only operate at a maximum speed of approximately 28 Kbps.  
3.7 OUT OF THE OFFICE — RECEIVING CALLS WITH CALL  
FORWARDING (ANALOG AND IP)  
3.7.1 Three ways to forward calls  
1. Automatic call forwarding  
The auto attendant can forward office calls to your call forwarding  
telephone number (i.e. remote extensions). Use the auto attendant  
message to prompt callers to select your remote extension number(s).  
(e.g. “To speak to John Smith, press 211.”)  
2. Manual call forwarding  
If someone in your office has answered a call at a local extension, the  
call can be transferred to one of the call forwarding (remote extension)  
numbers.  
a) Put the call on hold at the local extension.  
b) Dial the remote extension number (e.g. 211) to which you want the  
call forwarded.  
c) Hang up an analog phone and press Transfer or xfer on a IP phone.  
The call is handled according to the call cascade options of that remote  
extension.  
3. Conditional call forwarding  
If the auto attendant answers a call and the caller selects an extension or  
ring group number that is busy or is not answered, the auto attendant  
can forward the call to a remote (out of office) extension number.  
Conditional call forwarding is configured in the TalkSwitch software  
using the call cascade’s No answer or Busy settings for each local  
extension, remote extension and ring group (see 2.2.7 Local extensions  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.7.2 Transferring calls from a remote extension  
You can forward calls to a remote extension without using Centrex or 3-way  
calling services. Calls can be transferred to any local or remote extension,  
ring group or voice mailbox. This feature also applies to VoIP numbers.  
1. Press  
to place a call on hold at a remote extension anytime  
* *  
during a conversation. You hear the same dial tone as at a local extension  
and have the following three possibilities:  
a) Press  
to retrieve the call placed on hold.  
* *  
b) Dial any local extension, remote extension or ring group.  
c) Press on an analog phone or Transfer/xfer on a IP phone and  
*
the mailbox number to transfer a caller to a voice mailbox.  
If the system is configured in the TalkSwitch configuration software under  
Options -> Transfer Options in the Remote Transfer section to Perform a  
blind transfer, the system plays the prompt “Call Transferred — Goodbye.”  
and hangs up after the extension or mailbox is dialed.  
If the system is configured in the Transfer Options section to allow call  
screening, dial  
the transfer and return to the caller.  
4 to complete the transfer or  
5 to cancel  
* *  
* *  
3.7.3 Screening options for forwarded calls  
The screening options for call forwarding are configured in the TalkSwitch  
software using the call cascade Answered options in the remote extension  
window.  
Forwarding calls with screening  
When play accept/reject prompt is configured in the Answered call cascade  
option under Call Handling -> Remote Extension, TalkSwitch plays a pre-  
recorded prompt to callers asking them to hold and then dials your call  
forwarding number. When you answer the forwarded call, you hear a prompt  
#
saying: “You have a forwarded call. To accept the call, press  
. To reject the  
call, press .” If you reject the call, it is routed according to the call  
*
cascade option specified next to If a call is rejected from this ext.:  
When play caller’s name first is configured in the Answered call cascade  
option, TalkSwitch plays a pre-recorded prompt to callers asking them to  
record their name at the sound of the tone. TalkSwitch asks the caller to  
hold and dials the call forwarding telephone number. When you answer the  
forwarded call, TalkSwitch plays a pre-recorded prompt saying: “This is call  
1 3 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
forward, you have a call from...” and plays the recording of the caller’s  
#
name. To accept the forwarded call, press  
on your telephone keypad,  
re-route the call to its call screening call cascade options by pressing  
.
*
When either screening option is used, music on hold is enabled and you are  
not using the 3-way calling feature (Same Line Connect) to forward calls, the  
caller hears music while TalkSwitch is waiting for the remote extension to  
accept the call.  
If a forwarded call is not answered or the line is busy, TalkSwitch performs  
the following, based on how the call was originally forwarded:  
If the call was automatically forwarded, it follows the remote extension’s  
No Answer or Busy call cascade action.  
If the call was manually forwarded, it follows the remote extension’s No  
Answer or Busy call cascade action. This action can be changed to ring  
the extension back to the person who performed the transfer.  
If the call was conditionally forwarded, it follows the call cascade action  
in the No Answer or Busy for the original extension selected.  
3.7.4 Calls over VoIP with IP phones and Gateways  
If teleworkers are connected to the system via a certified compatible IP  
device (i.e. gateway or IP phone), there are several ways for them to interact  
with TalkSwitch.  
Making calls  
Once the phone or gateway is registered with the TalkSwitch IP server, calls  
can be made as follows:  
1. At dial tone, dial a phone number associated to any of the other  
locations.  
2. At dial tone, dial a phone number associated to one of the VoIP numbers  
on TalkSwitch. Ensure that an auto attendant is programmed to answer  
this line. Once the auto attendant has answered, dial an extension, VoIP  
location or voice mailbox. To place calls through the regular phone lines,  
you must activate and configure a call bridge account (see 2.5 Call Back/  
Call Bridge on page 98). To access regular phone lines dial 9 and enter  
the password for call bridge.  
Currently, TalkSwitch does not place calls on hold or transfer calls when  
you call other locations, since the call does not actually go through  
TalkSwitch.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Receiving calls  
Once the phone or gateway is registered with the TalkSwitch IP server, calls  
are received directly from other registered gateways or through the system.  
1. If the call is routed via TalkSwitch, you can transfer the caller dialing  
and any extension or voice mailbox.  
* *  
2. If the call came directly from a IP gateway or phone, you can transfer the  
call if your phone or service provider supports this feature.  
3.8 USING THE VOICEMAIL SYSTEM  
Each TalkSwitch unit comes with 30 minutes of voicemail recording  
capacity. This time is shared with auto attendant greetings. The capacity  
can be increased by adding TalkSwitch memory cards. You can add 1, 2, 4.5,  
or 9 hours of storage to each unit. When you insert the memory card, the  
system configures it automatically. Contact your TalkSwitch dealer to  
purchase memory cards.  
3.8.1 Activating voicemail boxes  
There are three types of voice mailboxes in the Voicemail folder of the  
configuration software.  
Local Ext. Voicemail  
The local mailboxes are associated with local extensions. All local extensions  
are activated with a respective mailbox by default. You can also activate the  
extension as an announcement or you can de-activate it.  
Remote Ext. Voicemail  
The remote mailboxes are associated with the remote extensions. If you  
activate a remote extension, it is activated as mailbox by default. You can  
also activate the extension as announcement or you can de-activate it.  
General Voicemail  
Activate these mailboxes in the General Voicemail window. They are not  
associated with particular extensions. You can also activate the extension as  
announcement or you can de-activate it.  
If you want incoming calls to go straight to a voice mailbox after a  
specified number of rings, program an auto attendant to answer and  
provide a fall through to voicemail.  
1 3 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Callers can reach voice mailboxes, call cascade, be transferred from a local  
extension or have announcements played through the auto attendant.  
To leave a message from a regular local extension:  
1. Dial  
and the mailbox number.  
*
To leave a message from a local IP extension:  
#
1. Dial and the mailbox number and press Dial, Send or  
.
*
To transfer a caller directly to voicemail from a regular phone:  
1. Press Flash , the mailbox number and hang up.  
*
To transfer a call to a voice mailbox from an IP phone:  
1. Press Transfer or xfer  
.
* *  
2. Enter the mailbox number.  
#
3. Press Dial, Send or  
.
4. Press Transfer or xfer to complete.  
Transferring a call to a voice mailbox does not apply to all IP phones.  
#
When a caller presses  
after leaving a message or after 2 minutes have  
elapsed, TalkSwitch plays a prompt asking callers if they wish to keep the  
message, listen to the message or re-record the message. Callers can press 0  
and the system directs the call according to the settings of that mailbox.  
3.8.2 Retrieving messages and accessing a voice mailbox  
The first time you access your voice mailbox, you are prompted to assign a  
password, record a greeting and record your name for the dial-by-name  
directory.  
For the general mailboxes, there are no directory listings and you are not  
prompted to record a name. If you wish to have your name in the company  
directory, use the mailbox associated with its extension as the directory is  
related to the extension’s mailbox. When your mailbox has been set up, you  
access it through the prompt instructions.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When a new message is left in a local extension mailbox, TalkSwitch plays a  
stutter dial tone when the handset is picked up. If the phone supports a  
frequency-shift keying (FSK) message waiting indicator, the light flashes. The  
TS-80, TS-200, TS-400 and TS-600 phones support a message waiting counter.  
The display on the phone shows the number of new messages stored in the  
mailbox(es) associated with that extension.  
#
1. Dial  
from a local extension or  
and the mailbox  
* *  
* *  
number at the auto attendant if you are dialing from an outside location.  
2. Local extensions can transfer employees to access voicemail by pressing  
Flash  
and entering the mailbox number.  
If Direc*t Lin*e Access is enabled, be sure to press Flash before trying to  
access your mailbox.  
If you have a line configured to go straight to voicemail, dial 8 during the  
greeting to access messages from outside phones.  
a) Press 1 to listen to messages.  
TalkSwitch always starts with newest message before it plays the  
older ones. While the message is playing or after the message has  
finished, you can dial the following:  
1
to rewind 10 seconds  
11  
3
to rewind to beginning of the message  
to skip ahead 10 seconds  
33  
5
to skip to the end of the message  
to listen to the time and date stamp  
to forward the message  
6
7
to delete a message  
9
to save a message  
to back up one level  
*
#
to skip to next message, leaving new messages as new.  
b) Press 2 to change greeting options.  
This allows you to record a new personal voicemail greeting. The  
1 4 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
default greeting is: “The extension you have reached is unavailable at  
this time. Please leave a message after the tone.  
Remember: While recording your greeting or announcement, callers can  
press  
to return to the auto attendant, if the call came from the auto  
*
#
attendant. When they are done recording, they can press  
for more  
options. You may want to give your callers these options for their  
convenience.  
c) Press 3 to change personal options.  
change your current password  
turn the auto date and time stamp on/off  
turn the phone number on/off  
set up or change pager and remote phone notification  
By default, the auto date and time stamp is on. This information is  
played at the end of each message. If you have caller ID service, the  
phone number is displayed with the time and date.  
d) Press 4 to record your name for the dial-by-name directory.  
If you haven’t recorded your name for the directory or if you wish to  
change the recording, press 4. The dial-by-name directory is accessed  
at the auto attendant according to your configuration. Callers are  
directed to enter the first 3 letters of the employee’s last name. The  
system finds the exact or closest match and plays the recorded name  
with the extension number, giving callers the option to connect to  
that extension.  
You must record your name in order for the extension to be included in  
the dial-by-name directory.  
3.8.3 Recording an announcement on a regular or an IP phone  
An announcement is a recorded message providing information to callers. It  
can be recorded using your phone as a voicemail message or loaded as an  
audio file. The system hangs up after playing an annoucement. Callers have  
the option of pressing  
attendant. Callers can also press 0 to perform other actions if this is  
during an annoucement to return to the auto  
*
configured in the voicemail options.  
You might include in the announcement a mention of the selections a caller  
may press and leave a section of silence at the end to give the caller time to  
make a selection.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To record an announcement, access a voice mailbox and select option 2 to  
change greeting options as described in 3.8.2 Retrieving messages and  
accessing a voice mailbox on page 139. To load a pre-recorded announcement  
or to configure 0 as an option to be selected, see 2.3.1 Mailbox options on  
page 67. To configure call handling options for announcements, see 2.4 Call  
3.8.4 Pager and cell phone notification  
When a new message is left in a voice mailbox, it can notify a pager, cell  
phone or a remote number.  
You can configure the system to notify you for every new message or for  
only the first new message received since the last time you accessed new  
messages For more information, see 2.3.2 Voicemail notification on page 68.  
If you use remote phone notification, you can accept or reject the  
notification call when you answer.  
#
Press  
Press  
to listen to messages.  
to postpone listening to messages.  
*
For details on configuring pager and remote phone notification, see 2.3.2.1  
3.9 MUSIC ON HOLD  
TalkSwitch can play music to callers when they are on hold, parked or  
queued. The music played is provided by the source you have connected to  
the music jack or from a sound file (8 KHz, 8 bit, mono, u-law, .wav format)  
stored on the unit(s). When a sound file is loaded on one of the TalkSwitch  
units, it is duplicated to all units on the LAN.  
Music on hold and call forwarding to remote extensions  
If you are using the telephone company’s 3-way calling/conference service  
(Same Line Connect) to activate the TalkSwitch call forwarding feature,  
callers do not hear your music while they are forwarded to a remote  
extension. When calls are forwarded, the caller is put on hold by the  
telephone company’s central office switch rather than by TalkSwitch and the  
caller hears silence while being transferred.  
A system prompt indicates that callers hear silence while the system is  
locating their party. This prompt explains to callers why there is silence for  
an extended period of time before connecting to the remote extension. This  
prompt cannot be disabled.  
1 4 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If you have two or more units on a LAN, we recommend that you load a  
.wav file to the system of units. If you use an external music source,  
supply a music source to each TalkSwitch unit. 1/8" audio splitters are  
available at most electronics stores.  
3.10 MODE SWITCHING OPTIONS  
Manual mode switching  
Use telephone keypad commands at a local extension or at the auto  
attendant to switch modes.  
#
1. Dial  
at the local extension dial tone or at the auto attendant to  
enter command mode.  
2. Enter a password if required.  
#
#
#
a) Dial 30  
b) Dial 31  
c) Dial 32  
to check the current mode.  
to activate mode 1.  
to activate mode 2.  
Automatic mode switching using the time scheduler  
Use the configuration software to activate the TalkSwitch time scheduler  
feature. You can configure TalkSwitch to switch between modes  
automatically (see 2.4.1 Modes on page 78).  
If you switch modes manually, TalkSwitch switches to the proper mode  
during the next scheduled mode change.  
Ensure that the TalkSwitch configuration software tool is closed at the  
time of the scheduled mode switch. The mode cannot change if the  
configuration software is open.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.11 OUT OF THE OFFICE — MAKING CALLS  
WITH CALL BACK AND CALL BRIDGE  
Working together, call back and call bridge act as your personal  
long-distance operator. Whether you are across town or around the world,  
these two features allow you to place calls from your office telephone  
line(s).  
You can make a call to TalkSwitch, access a telephone line connected to  
TalkSwitch and enter the number you want to dial. This is especially useful  
when you are out of the office with your cell phone and need to make a  
long-distance call. You can avoid the long-distance cell rates by making a  
local call to TalkSwitch and access your office savings plan through  
call bridge.  
3.11.1 Using call bridge  
1. Dial into a TalkSwitch line.  
2. When the auto attendant answers, select a hunt group (9, 8188 or Same  
Line Connect 80).  
3. Enter your account password. If you are using Same Line Connect and  
your line supports the 3-way calling/conference service, you are  
prompted to enter the phone number.  
4. When you have completed your call, do one of the following:  
#
#
a) Make another call by pressing  
.
TalkSwitch disconnects you from the call in progress. You can dial  
another number or redial the same number.  
#
b) Activate the auto attendant by pressing  
.
*
TalkSwitch ends the call bridge session and activates the auto  
attendant. When the auto attendant message begins to play, you  
have the following options:  
#
Press  
or  
55 to enter command mode  
*
Dial 6 to change/enter call back settings  
Dial a local or remote extension or a ring group. This option  
allows you to contact someone in your office, check your  
voicemail, etc.  
c) End the call bridge session by hanging up. This disconnects you from  
TalkSwitch. To ensure that TalkSwitch disconnects at the end of a call  
#
#
bridge session, press  
before hanging up.  
1 4 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The call bridge telephone number you dial can be local, long-distance, toll  
free (800 and 888) or international. Enter the telephone number as you  
would in your office. For long-distance calls, include the 1, country code  
and area code.  
3.11.2 Using call back  
The call back feature allows you to initiate TalkSwitch to call you at a  
specified telephone number. This gives you access to the following:  
Call bridge  
Local extensions, remote extensions and ring groups  
Voicemail  
Configuration settings  
Using call back involves 3 steps:  
1. Call your TalkSwitch telephone number to activate call back.  
2. Answer and accept call back. TalkSwitch calls you back within  
30 seconds.  
3. At the auto attendant you can choose to perform call bridge, dial an  
extension, access and retrieve voicemail or configure TalkSwitch.  
Activate call back  
There are two ways to activate call back.  
1. Using prompted call back activation from your out-of-office location:  
a) Dial a TalkSwitch telephone number.  
b) Let the line ring until the auto attendant answers.  
c) Dial 6 on the telephone keypad.  
d) If you have password protection on the account, enter your password.  
e) TalkSwitch offers a series of prompts:  
You can enter 1 and hang up to initiate the call back.  
If you need to enter a new prompted call back number, enter 2 and  
follow the prompts.  
For prompted call back, TalkSwitch always dials the last prompted call  
back number entered. If you do not have the auto attendant answer a  
line, a generic TalkSwitch auto attendant will answer after 15 rings. You  
can then dial 6 to access the call back settings.  
U S I N G T A L K S W I T C H  
1 4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Using auto call back activation from your out-of-office location:  
a) Dial one of the call back telephone numbers that has been configured  
for auto call back activation.  
b) Let the line ring at least once but no more than three times and hang  
up before the call is answered.  
c) Within 20 seconds, TalkSwitch calls your auto call back number.  
It is important to remember that all call back settings must be  
configured to use auto call back. Please ensure that the auto  
attendant for the line using call back does not answer before 4 rings.  
Accepting the call back  
There are two ways to accept a call back from TalkSwitch.  
#
1. Answer the call and press  
.
If required, enter your password. This option is used when you have a  
direct line to your call back telephone number.  
The Use Announced message option allows the call back from TalkSwitch to  
reach you when you are in a hotel or an office where calls are intercepted by  
a receptionist or switchboard operator. When the call back is answered,  
TalkSwitch begins playing your pre-recorded message (e.g. “Please forward  
this call to Bob Smith in room 312”). The message is repeated for 2 minutes.  
#
When the call is forwarded to you, press  
and enter your password on  
the telephone keypad to accept the call back. If the call back is not accepted  
within the initial 2-minute period, TalkSwitch disconnects the call back.  
When you accept the call, you hear the auto attendant. You can select to  
check your voicemail, ring an extension, use call bridge or enter command  
mode.  
1 4 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R 4  
CHAPTER 4: CALL DETAIL RECORD (CDR) LOGGING  
CALL DETAIL RECORD (CDR)  
LOGGING  
This chapter covers the setup and retrieval of records generated by calls  
through the phone system.  
The Store to File on TalkSwitch option is recommended for all units with LAN  
ports. The Real-time to Serial option is only available with units that have a  
serial port.  
4.1 ENABLING CALL DETAIL RECORD (CDR) LOGGING  
Units can report the CDRs in real-time to a computer connected to the Serial  
port, or log the CDRs in a file on the unit itself.  
If multiple units are networked on a LAN, the CDR data is stored on unit 1.  
1. Connect TalkSwitch to your computer and open the TalkSwitch  
configuration software.  
2. Click Tools -> Call Logging Output.  
3. Select Real-time to Serial Port or Store to File on TalkSwitch.  
Figure 112: Call log output options  
C A L L D E T A I L R E C O R D ( C D R ) L O G G I N G  
1 4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. File -> Save to TalkSwitch  
Figure 113: Save settings  
When storing the CDR to a file on TalkSwitch, approximately 6000 records  
are stored in a circular buffer. This means that after about 6000 records, the  
oldest ones will be deleted and new ones are created. On a very busy system,  
6000 records may only cover a couple of days, but on a system with less  
traffic, 6000 records may cover more than a month.When the CDR data is  
streaming real-time from the Serial port, there is no buffer limit and no file  
is generated on TalkSwitch. When a call event is completed, the record is  
sent through Serial port.  
4.2 RETRIEVING DATA  
There are 2 different methods for retrieving the data from TalkSwitch:  
Web Interface Store to File on TalkSwitch. (48-CA and 48-CVA models)  
Serial Interface Real-time to Serial Port  
While the TalkSwitch configuration software displays two options for Call  
Logging Output, only the available option can be selected.  
4.2.1 Web interface — Store to File on TalkSwitch  
You can access the CDR information through a web interface as follows:  
1. Enter the unit IP address in the Address field of a web browser.  
Select System Information -> IP Configuration in the configuration  
software to find the unit’s IP address.  
2. Enter the system name in the User Name field and the administrator  
password in the Password field.  
1 4 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Figure 114: Log in window  
Select System Information -> Administration in the TalkSwitch  
configuration software to find the username.  
3. Click on the link Call Detail Record (CDR) Management.  
Figure 115: Initial CDR web interface  
4. You may either right click on Download CDR to save the information to  
your PC or left click on the link to view the current information. Browser  
specific information is available on the website when you scroll down.  
Figure 116: Dowload CDR  
Once the CDR file has been downloaded, you can clear the buffer/file by  
selecting the link under Clear CDR. The link will take you to a confirmation  
page. Select Yes to proceed or No to cancel.  
C A L L D E T A I L R E C O R D ( C D R ) L O G G I N G  
1 4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 117: CDR web interface  
4.2.2 Serial interface — Real-time to Serial Port  
In order to capture the data in a real-time environment your PC has to be  
connected to TalkSwitch unit ID 1 with a serial cable.  
1. Launch Hyper Terminal by clicking Start -> Programs ->  
Accessories -> Communications -> HyperTerminal.  
2. A window pops up prompting for a connection name. Enter TalkSwitch,  
then click OK.  
Figure 118: Launching HyperTerminal  
3. In the Connect using: drop-down menu, select the PC COM port where the  
serial cable is connected and click OK.  
If you have not used HyperTerminal before you will be prompted to set  
this program as a default telnet application and enter your area code.  
1 5 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 119: Connecting...  
4. Set the bits per second to 57600 and click OK. All other values can be  
left at their defaults.  
Figure 120: COM1 properties  
5. Click on Transfer -> Capture Text...  
Figure 121: Save your data  
6. Select the directory and filename where you wish to save the data.  
7. Click Start.  
C A L L D E T A I L R E C O R D ( C D R ) L O G G I N G  
1 5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.3 ANALYZING THE DATA  
We recommend that you clear the text file immediately after it is  
downloaded. Restart saving data to a new file. This allows easier viewing  
and analyzing of the captured information.  
The data can be viewed either through the web interface or downloaded into  
a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel) as a delimited text file. The log is divided into 13  
columns identified by numbers:  
1. Call Type  
2. Log Number  
3. Event Counter  
4. Date  
6. Event Duration  
7. Connection  
8. Phone Number  
9. Name from  
Caller ID  
10. Line  
11. Account Number  
12. Carrier Code  
13. PIN Number  
5. Time  
Each column contains specific information related to the current state of the  
call. The following is a list of the columns with a description:  
1. Type — This column can contain the following characters:  
a) I — Inbound call  
b) T — Transfer state  
c) O — Outbound call  
d) B — Bridged call. For example, a call in on one line that is forwarded  
over another line. This can include calls forwarded to remote  
extensions.  
e) X — Blocked call  
f) A — Account number assigned to the call with the same log #.  
2. Log # — This column indicates log number for the call. For the duration  
of the call, the log number remains the same. The event number will  
increment with each change of state. The first digit of the log number  
indicates on which unit the event originated.  
3. Event — This column tracks various state changes of the call. For  
example, when an auto attendant answers, the counter might be 1. When  
the caller selects an extension, the counter increments to 2, etc.  
4. Date — This column shows the date of the call (MM/DD/YYYY).  
5. Time — This column contains the time that the call entered a specific  
state. The time is displayed in 24-hour format.  
1 5 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Duration — This column indicates the total time the call was in this  
state/event.  
7. Connection — This column indicates where the call was for each event.  
This includes auto attendants, voicemail, extension ringing or queuing.  
RCO indicates that multiple extensions are ringing.  
Exxx = Connected to extension xxx  
(xxx = 111-118, 121- 128, 131-138, 141-148)  
Axxx = Connected to auto attendant 00x (x= 1 to 9)  
Rxxx = Ringing at extension xxx  
(xxx = 111-118, 121-128, 131-138, 141-148)  
Qxxx = Queued at extension xxx  
(xxx = 111-118, 121-128, 131-138, 141-148, 300-309)  
Mxxx = Connected to voice mailbox xxx  
(xxx = 111-148, 211-248, 410-449)  
COxx = Forwarded out on line xx. (See 10. Line below for more details).  
8. Phone Number — This column displays the phone number of the  
inbound or the outbound caller if available.  
9. Name — This column displays the name of the caller if available.  
10. Line — This column indicates on which unit and line the call came in or  
out. The format of this information is unit and line number. Lines 1–4  
are PSTN lines and 5–8 are VoIP lines.  
Example: 11 — unit 1, line 1  
23 — unit 2, line 3  
16 — unit 1, VoIP 2  
11. Account Number — This column contains an account number that the  
user can assign after a call. This allows you to group calls together that  
may have been placed over time to calculate the total amount of time  
spent with a particular customer. The account number can be a numerical  
code up to 15 digits long. To assign an account number after a call has  
#
been completed, dial  
88 + <Account Number> +  
.
*
If Direct Line Access is enabled on an extension:  
a) Analog phone — press Flash, then dial  
88 + <Account Number>  
*
*
#
+
.
b) IP phone — press  
, then dial  
88 + <Account Number>  
* *  
#
+
.
12. Carrier Code/Access Code — This column shows the phone number of  
the preferred long-distance provider.  
C A L L D E T A I L R E C O R D ( C D R ) L O G G I N G  
1 5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. PIN or User Code — This column shows the user’s access code to dial out  
using a specific carrier.  
The data can be imported into any call management software or an Excel  
spreadsheet as a delimited text file. After the import, the data can be  
grouped and tallied based on the criteria set forth.  
Example:  
1. Total line usage for a day 4. Average call times  
2. Number of inbound calls  
3. Wait times  
5. Number of calls per line  
1 5 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R 5  
CHAPTER 5: VOIP INFORMATION  
VOIP INFORMATION  
5.1 INTRODUCTION TO VOIP  
TalkSwitch units can be hybrid PSTN/VoIP phone systems. The addition of  
VoIP to the TalkSwitch product line adds the ability to use a broadband IP  
connection for voice calls.  
VoIP also enables the use of IP phones as extensions on your TalkSwitch  
system. Connect an IP phone to your LAN and TalkSwitch can configure it to  
have the same powerful features as regular (analog) phones, plus exciting  
new features that break the boundaries of possibility for the office phone.  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA units can be used in many different applications. The  
most popular VoIP configurations are multi-branch, teleworker and service  
provider integration.  
TalkSwitch uses the industry-standard Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) to  
make and manage VoIP calls. The term SIP is often used in place of VoIP.  
To connect to a VoIP network or VoIP service to make and receive SIP calls,  
each location must be able to establish a high-speed connection to the  
Internet or private network. The following steps should ensure success for  
typical network connection methods.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5.2 OPTIMIZING YOUR IP NETWORK FOR VOIP  
5.2.1 The broadband connection  
Figure 122: Broadband  
Modem  
xDSL  
Cable  
Satellite  
etc.  
For optimal quality of VoIP calls on your system, we recommend that you  
subscribe to a high-speed broadband connection from your service provider.  
‘Lite’ broadband is not suitable for simultaneous voice and data traffic.  
‘Lite’ broadband typically runs 128 Kbps downstream and 64 Kbps upstream.  
The limiting factor for a broadband connection is the upstream bandwidth to  
the Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
Example: If you have a 1 Mbps ADSL connection from your service provider,  
it likely means you have an upstream bandwidth of approximately  
380 Kbps. Keep in mind that not the full 380 Kbps are available at all times.  
You can estimate about half of the upstream bandwidth as being available.  
In this case, you could safely support two simultaneous G.711 calls  
(100 Kbps/calls) or four simultaneous G.726 calls (50 Kbps/calls) or 10  
simultaneous G.729 calls without factoring in other data traffic on the  
network at the same time. With additional traffic on the Internet or private  
IP network, the number of simultaneous calls supported is reduced.  
G.711, G.726 and G.729 are VoIP codecs. For more information on codecs,  
5.2.2 The router/NAT/firewall  
Figure 123: Router  
Modem  
Router/NAT  
xDSL  
Cable  
Satellite  
etc.  
1 5 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
In a typical small office environment, there are several computers connected  
to an Ethernet switch, sometimes integrated into a router. A router handles  
the connection between two or more IP networks. Routers look at the  
destination IP addresses of the packets passing through and rout them  
accordingly. In a network that shares data and voice, it is critical that the  
voice traffic has priority over the data packets. Some routers support Quality  
of Service (QoS) functionality for this purpose. These routers are identified  
as devices that support QoS, VoIP or prioritization.  
5.2.3 Connecting to a LAN and IP network  
Ensure the TalkSwitch or gateway is connected to a Local Area Network  
(LAN), equipped with an Ethernet switch and router or to a router with an  
integrated switch. A PC and the router/switch should be connected to the  
LAN for configuring the TalkSwitch unit.  
Figure 124: LAN  
ROUTER with integrated SWITCH  
Hub/Switch  
Modem  
Router/NAT  
TalkSwitch  
xDSL  
LAN  
Cable  
Satellite  
etc.  
To share voice and data properly, your network requires an Ethernet switch.  
A switch isolates the Ethernet ports from each other and only allows traffic  
intended for the device connected to that port. This ensures that data  
traffic doesn’t compete with voice traffic. The most successful way to  
separate voice and data traffic is to install a router using different subnets  
for voice and data.  
5.2.3.1 Confirm sufficient network capacity for VoIP  
Ensure that the LAN in each location has a reliable high-speed broadband  
connection to the Internet. The quality of VoIP calls, especially on mixed  
voice and data networks, depends on high data-transfer rates across the  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
network. ‘Lite’ broadband connections are not suitable for simultaneous  
voice and data traffic.  
To test the VoIP call capacity based on your Internet connection speed,  
perform the test available on our website at:www.talkswitch.com/voip/  
voip_capacity.php.  
5.2.3.2 Confirm router/firewall path for voice data  
In order to pass through a router’s firewall, voice data received by your  
network must be mapped to the appropriate TalkSwitch unit. TalkSwitch  
uses UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) to automatically map firewall ports to  
forward VoIP data. If your router supports UPnP, ensure that it is enabled  
(see your router documentation for configuration details).  
If a router does not support UPnP, you will need to configure the router to  
map specific ports to TalkSwitch. The following describes which ports to map  
toTalkSwitch:  
To allow SIP Signaling data to be forwarded to TalkSwitch, firewall port  
5060 must be mapped to the TalkSwitch unit known as the local proxy.  
By default, this is the lowest numbered TalkSwitch on a LAN. The IP  
configuration window of the TalkSwitch software indicates with an  
asterix which TalkSwitch unit is the local proxy. SIP Signaling uses UDP.  
Example: in a 4-unit network, firewall port 5060 (UDP) would need to be  
mapped to the IP Address of the TalkSwitch unit ID #1.  
To allow voice traffic to be forwarded to TalkSwitch, corresponding ports  
must be mapped to each TalkSwitch unit. The following table shows the  
firewall ports to map to each TalkSwitch unit on a LAN.  
Firewall ports* required open for VoIP communication with TalkSwitch  
Description Type  
Unit 1  
Unit 2  
Unit 3  
Unit 4  
Voice traffic UDP  
6000–6006 6010–6016 6020–6026 6030–6036  
*Default port numbers. For instructions on re-assigning these numbers, contact TalkSwitch Technical  
Support.  
If you plan on configuring TalkSwitch remotely, you will need to map  
port 9393 (Type: TCP) to the TalkSwitch unit that is being configured.  
Configuration is done using TCP.  
TIP: For information on configuring a router for port forwarding, visit  
http://www.portforward.com/routers.htm.  
1 5 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Prioritize your voice traffic  
If your Internet connection is shared between computers and TalkSwitch  
(i.e. data and voice), it is critical that the voice traffic has priority over the  
data traffic. Many routers support Quality of Service (QoS) routing for this  
purpose. If your router supports QoS, ensure that it is enabled (see your  
router documentation for configuration details).  
DDNS Support  
If you are using Dynamic Domain Name Service (DDNS) to manage the IP  
address of the SIP server, ensure that your router(s) support the specific  
DDNS service that you are using.  
5.3 SETTING UP A VOIP NETWORK  
A TalkSwitch VoIP network can be set up in 4 steps:  
1. Connect a TalkSwitch or SIP-compatible gateway at each location.  
2. Select a TalkSwitch to use as the SIP network server.  
3. Assign phone numbers to each VoIP location.  
4. Configure TalkSwitch to make and manage VoIP calls.  
5.3.1 Connect TalkSwitch or SIP-compatible gateways  
In order to create a VoIP network, a VoIP-equipped TalkSwitch or a VoIP  
compatible gateway, such as a Mediatrix® 2102, is required at each location.  
Each location in a multi-location network can support up to 4 TalkSwitch  
units, with a maximum of 32 local extensions (analog and/or IP phones) and  
16 VoIP linesper location.  
Example: Figure 125 on page 160 shows a multi-location network where two  
locations are equipped with TalkSwitch systems and a teleworker is equipped  
with a Mediatrix 2102 device. TalkSwitch and the Mediatrix 2102 route VoIP  
calls over the Internet, while local calls are routed over the regular  
(traditional) telephone network.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 5 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Figure 125: Multi-location network with VoIP calling  
New York office  
Telephone  
Network  
San Francisco  
office  
TalkSwitch 48CVA  
Miami home  
TalkSwitch
Mediatrix 2102  
5.3.2 Select which TalkSwitch to use as the SIP network server  
A multi-location SIP network requires a SIP server to manage calls across the  
network. The SIP server contains registration information for all SIP devices  
in the network. When making or receiving a VoIP call, a device will register  
with the SIP server, which will then route the call to the appropriate  
destination.  
TalkSwitch units have a built-in SIP server to manage a VoIP network.  
Though every networked TalkSwitch unit has the capability, you must  
designate only one TalkSwitch unit in a network as the SIP server.  
For VoIP calls made through a VoIP service provider, the service provider  
will act as the SIP Server.  
5.3.2.1 Which location and unit should be the SIP server?  
Any TalkSwitch unit on the network can be designed to be the SIP server.  
To simplify network operation and reliability, we recommend that you  
choose a location that has a static, rather than a dynamic public IP address.  
A static public IP address does not change, providing a consistent  
connection address for each location to communicate with the SIP server.  
1 6 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If you do not have a static IP address, you can obtain a Fully Qualified  
Domain Name (FQDN) from a Dynamic Domain Name Service (DDNS) provider.  
A DDNS matches your dynamic IP addresses to your FQDN, so that your  
TalkSwitch VoIP network operation is not affected by IP address changes.  
One DDNS provider is DynDNS.  
Visit http://www.dyndns.org/services/dyndns for more information.  
Configuring TalkSwitch to act as the SIP server is described in 5.4.2.1  
Example: Building on the previous example, the TalkSwitch system in the  
San Francisco office is designated as the SIP server. When a location initiates  
a call, the TalkSwitch in San Francisco will resolve the destination address  
for the call and coordinate a connection to route the call to its destination.  
5.3.3 Assign phone numbers to each VoIP location  
You can now assign phone numbers to locations in your VoIP network.  
Each TalkSwitch unit with VoIP lines can support up to 12 VoIP phone  
numbers. Unique call handling scenarios can be configured for each VoIP  
number. VoIP phone numbers can be 3 or more digits in length.  
TalkSwitch supports 50 VoIP location numbers (250 to 299) that permit  
direct dialing from any extension or auto attendant in the network. If  
needed, numbers outside of this range can also be added. See 5.4.3 VoIP  
Numbers on page 170 for details. Each VoIP phone number assigned in a  
multi-location network must be unique (i.e. only used for one location).  
For VoIP calls made through a VoIP service provider, the service provider will  
assign the VoIP numbers to be used for their service.  
To assist in assigning VoIP numbers for your network, use the 5.6 VoIP  
Assigning VoIP phone numbers in your TalkSwitch configuration is described  
Example: Continuing with the previous example, five VoIP location numbers  
are assigned to VoIP lines in San Francisco (251 to 255), nine are assigned to  
VoIP lines in New York (261 to 269), and one is assigned to the teleworker  
office in Miami (271). These phone numbers can be dialed directly from an  
extension or from an auto attendant from any location within the network.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 6 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 126: TalkSwitch network configuration  
New York office  
261 266  
262 267  
263 268  
264 269  
265  
Telephone  
Network  
San Francisco  
office  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
TalkSwitch
Miami home  
271  
TalkSwitch
(SIP server)  
Mediatrix 2102  
5.4 VOIP CONFIGURATION  
5.4.1 Configure TalkSwitch IP addresses  
Each TalkSwitch system in a multi-location network must be configured with  
both local IP and public IP address information. These addresses are used to  
direct VoIP calls to the appropriate location. Each TalkSwitch unit in a  
system will have a different local IP address, and share a common public  
IP address.  
5.4.1.1 Set the TalkSwitch local IP address  
The following steps describe how to set the local IP address(es) of a  
TalkSwitch system:  
1. Open the TalkSwitch configuration software by double-clicking the  
TalkSwitch icon on your Desktop or, from the Windows Start menu,  
select Programs, the TalkSwitch folder, and click TalkSwitch.  
2. In the TalkSwitch System Configuration window, select  
System Information -> IP Configuration from the menu at the left.  
3. TalkSwitch is factory configured to use DHCP (Dynamic Host  
Configuration Protocol) to automatically obtain its system IP settings. If  
the location has a DHCP server, which is typically a function of the  
router, the fields on the screen will automatically be filled in with the  
1 6 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
correct IP information. Click Use the following IP and DNS information to  
‘lock in’ these settings and ensure they are saved as the system IP  
settings.  
4. If the location does not have a DHCP server, the System IP Settings fields  
will not be filled in. Click Use the following IP and DNS information and  
enter the IP address(es), Subnet mask, Default Gateway, Preferred DNS  
Server, and Alternate DNS Server information in the appropriate fields. For  
details on these settings, refer to 2.2.2 IP Configuration on page 37.  
5. If there are multiple units in a system, enter the IP addresses of all units  
in the system (Unit 2 IP Address, Unit 3 IP Address, Unit 4 IP Address).  
Figure 127: Local IP configuration  
5.4.1.2 Set the TalkSwitch public IP address  
The public IP address of a TalkSwitch system is assigned by your Internet  
Service Provider. Depending on the type of service, you will either have a  
dynamic or static IP address. If you are unsure which type you have, contact  
your Internet Service Provider.  
The following steps describe how to set the public IP address of a TalkSwitch  
system:  
1. Specify the Type of Public WAN IP for Internet Connection by selecting  
either dynamic or static from the drop-down list. For private networks,  
please ensure the WAN IP address is the same as the Local IP address.  
If this TalkSwitch system will act as the SIP server for a network, we  
recommend having a static Public IP address.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 6 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. If this TalkSwitch system will act as the SIP server for a network and has  
a dynamic Public IP address, enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name  
(FQDN) associated with the Public IP address. If the address is static,  
leave this field blank.  
You can obtain a FQDN from a Dynamic Domain Name Service (DDNS)  
provider such as DynDNS (visit http://www.dyndns.org/services/  
dyndns). Check your router documentation to confirm which DDNS your  
router can support.  
Figure 128: IP Configuration  
5.4.2 Configure TalkSwitch Profile  
5.4.2.1 TalkSwitch Profile  
Select System Information -> VoIP Configuration  
Figure 129: TalkSwitch profile  
1 6 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TalkSwitch Profile tab  
Use this tab to configure a TalkSwitch VoIP network.  
TalkSwitch has a built-in IP server proxy/registrar/redirect. This facilitates  
the configuration and maintenance for multi-branch and telework  
applications.  
A multi-location TalkSwitch system requires that one (and only one) unit be  
configured to act as the SIP server (Redirect Proxy/Registrar). For  
information on the SIP server, see 5.3.2 Select which TalkSwitch to use as the  
This TalkSwitch location is the Proxy/Registrar:  
If this location is designated to be the proxy/registrar server, click this  
checkbox. When it is enabled and other IP devices are registered with  
this system, any calls made within the group contact this device to  
resolve the destination location. Once the destination is resolved, the  
call is made directly from the source to the destination location.  
The TalkSwitch registrar supports digest authentication. The digest  
mechanism is a challenge/response protocol in which the client presents  
its credentials in response to a challenge from the server. This method of  
authentication is very secure. To enable authentication, select yes  
(digest) from the drop-down list under registrar authentication. Using  
authentication will allow only authorized devices to access the network.  
Proxy Server Name:  
If this location is acting as the proxy server, it is filled in automatically.  
If this location is not the proxy server, enter the IP address or domain  
name associated to the proxy server. If the server is using a different port  
number than the default, specify the port number after a colon at the  
end of the domain or IP address.  
Example: 222.234.432.234:5061  
Registrar Server Name:  
If this location is acting as the registrar server, it is filled in  
automatically.  
If this location is not the registrar server, enter the IP address or domain  
name associated to the registrar server. If a TalkSwitch 48-CVA is acting  
as the server, both the proxy server location and the registrar server  
location fields should have the same information. If the server is using a  
different port number than the default, specify the port number after a  
colon at the end of the domain or IP address.  
Example: VoIP.domain.com:5061  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 6 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Outbound Proxy:  
If TalkSwitch is being provisioned with a VoIP service provider, enter the  
outbound proxy associated with the service provider.  
Realm/Domain:  
If this location is the proxy/registrar, you can assign a realm/domain  
name for your network. (e.g. abccompany.com). The Realm/Domain field  
may be required when TalkSwitch is being provisioned with a VoIP service  
provider. In this case, enter the realm/domain associated with the  
service provider. If this unit is not the proxy/registrar, it must have the  
same realm as the registrar server.  
User Name and Password section  
User/Account:  
If this location is the proxy/registrar and you have enabled  
authentication, assign a user/account name to this unit. This account  
will be required by all other locations for registration purposes.  
If this unit is not the proxy/registrar and if authentication is required, it  
must have the same user/account name as the registrar server.  
Password:  
If this location is the proxy/registrar and you have enabled  
authentication, assign a password to this unit. This password is required  
by all other locations for registration purposes.  
If this unit is not the proxy/registrar and authentication is required, it  
must have the same password as the registrar server.  
VoIP Lines  
TalkSwitch offers the flexibility to share VoIP numbers with the TalkSwitch  
network and a service provider. You can reserve lines for use with one or the  
other depending on your requirements.  
VoIP lines available for use with the TalkSwitch network:  
By default, there are no restrictions on VoIP number use between the  
TalkSwitch and service provider profiles. If you need to give priority of  
availability to calls being placed in/out of this location on the TalkSwitch  
VoIP network, select an upper limit for the number of lines to use for  
each profile.  
Maximum number of VoIP lines for incoming calls:  
The maximum number of VoIP numbers available is determined by how  
many lines are available (shared) with the TalkSwitch VoIP network. For  
business reasons, you might want to make all lines available for incoming  
calls and restrict the number of lines used for outgoing calls. It is  
recommended that at least one line be allocated for incoming calls.  
1 6 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maximum number of VoIP lines for outgoing calls:  
The maximum number of VoIP numbers available is determined by how  
many lines are available (shared) with the TalkSwitch VoIP network. For  
business reasons, you might want make all lines available for incoming  
calls and restrict outgoing calls so that no incoming calls are getting  
missed. It is recommended that at least one line be allocated for outgoing  
calls.  
Codec Options (button)  
A codec is a method of compressing and decompressing audio signals for  
communication across digital networks. TalkSwitch supports 3 standardized  
VoIP codecs:  
G.729 (default — low bandwidth)  
G.726 (better voice quality — medium bandwidth)  
G.711 (best voice quality — high bandwidth)  
One of these codecs must be selected as the Preferred Codec. By default  
G.729 is used to accommodate the maximum number of concurrent calls.  
Voice Activity Detection (VAD) analyzes an audio stream to detect the  
presence or absence of speech and distinguishes speech from background  
noise. VAD can be used to reduce voice bandwidth when no speech is  
detected and reduce unwanted noise transmission.  
Figure 130: Codec  
View Registrar Entries (button)  
If this location is the designated SIP server (proxy/registrar), click this  
button to view which systems are registered with the SIP server. A window  
opens listing all TalkSwitch systems and gateways registered with this  
system. Client is the phone number assigned to a VoIP line. Contact is the  
information used by the SIP server to contact the client. It is comprised of  
the phone number, public IP address and part number. Expires is the amount  
of time, in seconds, that the client is registered with the SIP server before  
having to re-register.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 6 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 131: Registrar entries  
View Registration Status (button)  
Click this button to see if this system is registered with the designated  
SIP server. A window opens listing all registered system VoIP phone numbers.  
Client is the phone number assigned to a VoIP line. Status is the registration  
status (registered or not registered).  
Figure 132: Registration status  
5.4.2.2 Service Provider profile  
Service Provider Profile tab  
TalkSwitch CVA can register with VoIP service providers to make and receive  
calls using their service. Visit www.talkswitch.com/support to access a list of  
service providers that have been certified interoperable with TalkSwitch.  
Service Configuration Guides are also available for download. They contain all  
the specific necessary information to complete your configuration.  
1 6 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Information in those documents should be used instead of this guide. If  
there is no configuration guide for your service provider, follow the  
instructions below.  
Figure 133: Service Provider profile  
Service Provider Name:  
Enter the name for your VoIP service provider. The name will be displayed  
elsewhere in the configuration software in areas related to VoIP service.  
Proxy Server Name:  
Enter the IP address or domain name associated with the proxy server,  
exactly as specified by your service provider. If the server is using a  
different port than 5060, specify the port number after a colon at the  
end of the domain or IP address.  
Example: 222.234.432.234:5061  
Registrar Server Name:  
Enter the IP address or domain name associated with the registrar server,  
exactly as specified by your service provider. If the server is using a  
different port number than 5060, specify the port number after a colon  
at the end of the domain or IP address.  
Example: VoIP.domain.com:5061  
Outbound Proxy:  
Enter the outbound proxy (if required) associated with the service  
provider.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 6 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Realm/Domain:  
Enter the realm/domain (if required) associated with the service  
provider.  
VoIP Lines  
The descriptions for the VoIP lines under the TalkSwitch Provider Profile tab  
below are the same as described in VoIP Lines on page 166.  
VoIP lines available for use with this Service Provider  
Maximum number of VoIP lines for incoming calls  
Maximum number of VoIP lines for outgoing calls  
Codec Options (button)  
View Registration Status (button)  
5.4.3 VoIP Numbers  
Each VoIP-capable TalkSwitch unit supports up to 12 VoIP phone numbers.  
You can configure unique call handling scenarios for each VoIP number.  
You must associate each VoIP number with either the TalkSwitch profile or  
the service provider profile. Any VoIP number may use any VoIP line (i.e.  
trunk) to make or receive a call.  
Example: You might assign a general number for customers to reach the  
main auto attendant greeting and configure up to 11 other numbers so that  
the inbound calls will ring straight through to specific extensions in the  
office. A VoIP-capable TalkSwitch unit can support up to four simultaneous  
VoIP calls. VoIP numbers can be three or more digits long.  
Each VoIP phone number assigned in a multi-location network must be  
unique (i.e. only used for one location). For convenience, TalkSwitch  
supports 50 VoIP location numbers (250 to 299) that permit direct dialing  
from any extension or auto attendant in the network.  
If needed, you can also add numbers outside of that range and access them  
using hunt groups. You can assign these numbers when the 3-digit VoIP  
numbers have already been assigned or reserved. To do this:  
1. Under System Information -> VoIP Numbers, select an available VoIP  
number and assign it to a unique number (i. e. 4004).  
2. Select System Information -> Line Hunt Groups.  
1 7 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Ensure that you have at least one line hunt group configured (i.e. 88) to  
Line Type: TalkSwitch VoIP Numbers.  
4. Callers can now dial 88 from any extension to get a VoIP dial tone and  
then enter 4004 to reach the VoIP location.  
Figure 134: TalkSwitch profile in System Information  
For VoIP calls made through a service provider, the service provider will  
assign the VoIP numbers to be used for their service. To assist in assigning  
VoIP numbers for your network, use the 5.6 VoIP network administration  
5.4.3.1 Assign VoIP phone numbers  
TalkSwitch Profile section  
All VoIP numbers are inactive when the system is first configured.  
1. In the TalkSwitch System Configuration window, select  
System Information -> VoIP Numbers.  
2. Select VoIP 1 and check the Activate VoIP Number box, the default profile  
for entering a phone number is the TalkSwitch Profile.  
3. Phone numbers 250-299 have special functionality with TalkSwitch.  
They can be dialed directly from any extension or auto attendant and  
are routed automatically via VoIP to the destination with the number  
assigned to one of its ports. Part of the role of an administrator is to  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 7 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
keep track of all phone numbers assigned to each location to prevent  
duplicate numbers in multiple locations. We recommend that you use  
the numbers 250–299. It will facilitate calling from extensions and auto  
attendants.  
Ensure that each number assigned is unique in the network.  
For each TalkSwitch unit with VoIP lines on the network, you can assign  
up to 12 VoIP phone numbers, increasing the number of inbound VoIP call  
handling options available.  
4. Repeat the above steps for VoIP numbers 2-12.  
5. For systems with multiple units, repeat the process for each TalkSwitch  
unit (click on the tabs labeled TalkSwitch 1, TalkSwitch 2, TalkSwitch 3,  
and TalkSwitch 4).  
If you are upgrading from release 3.21 or earlier software, numbers  
previously assigned to VoIP lines will be mapped to the 12 available VoIP  
numbers. The numbers may not appear on consecutive VoIP number tabs.  
Check each tab after the upgrade is complete.  
5.4.3.2 Configure call handling for VoIP numbers  
Configuring call handling for VoIP numbers customizes TalkSwitch to fit the  
unique needs of your business. These call handling options are similar to the  
options available for your regular phone lines. Perform the following steps  
to configure VoIP call handling options for each networked TalkSwitch unit  
with VoIP lines.  
1. In the TalkSwitch System Configuration window, select  
Call Handling -> VoIP Numbers.  
2. Select your first VoIP number (It will be labeled with the number you  
assigned in Assign VoIP Phone Numbers above).  
3. From the drop-down list next to On an incoming call during mode:, select  
the mode to configure (for example, Mode 1).  
4. From the drop-down lists, select Ring extensions only, Play auto  
attendant, or Go to voice mailbox.  
For Ring extensions only, select the extensions from the list (by default  
they are all selected).  
1 7 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Play auto attendant, select which auto attendant to play (for  
example, 1), the number of rings to take place before the auto attendant  
answers (for example, after 2 rings), and the extensions to ring before  
the auto attendant answers. If you want the auto attendant to answer all  
calls immediately without ringing extensions, select immediately rather  
than the number of rings.  
For Go to voice mailbox, select the mailbox number (for example, 111)  
and the number of rings to occur before the call goes to the voice  
mailbox.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each mode.  
Figure 135: Call handling  
6. Repeat this process to configure the VoIP numbers 2-12.  
7. For systems with multiple units, repeat the process for each TalkSwitch  
unit (click on the tabs labeled TalkSwitch 1, TalkSwitch 2, TalkSwitch 3,  
and TalkSwitch 4).  
5.4.3.3 Assign service provider phone numbers  
1. In the TalkSwitch System Configuration window, select  
System Information ->VoIP Numbers.  
2. Select 1 and check the Activate VoIP Number box, the default profile for  
entering a phone number is the TalkSwitch Profile. Select Service Provider  
Profile.  
3. Enter one of the phone numbers, exactly as provided by your VoIP service  
provider. If your service provider requires a country code, enter it,  
otherwise leave it blank.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 7 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Enter the User/Account information and Password for this particular  
phone number.  
5. Repeat the above steps for VoIP numbers 2-12 as is required.  
For systems with multiple units, repeat the process for each TalkSwitch unit  
(click on the tabs labeled TalkSwitch 1, TalkSwitch 2, TalkSwitch 3, and  
TalkSwitch 4).  
Figure 136: Service provider profile in System Information  
5.5 FAQ  
How does VoIP work?  
Voice over IP (VoIP), sends calls over the Internet or any Internet Protocol  
(IP) network by converting voice traffic into data packets. These packets are  
routed over the IP network the same way as other data, then reassembled at  
the point of arrival and converted back to voice.  
Does a VoIP call sound like a regular phone call?  
Under the right conditions, VoIP calls sound as good or better than regular  
phone calls. Voice quality is affected by numerous factors, including how it  
is compressed and decompressed for delivery over the Internet and how  
packets are processed. A few steps can help ensure call quality.  
High-speed connections on both ends of the call  
Good quality VoIP requires a broadband connection to support more  
simultaneous VoIP calls. Please visit our site at www.talkswitch.com/  
voip/voip_capacity.php to determine what your Internet connection  
1 7 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
can support. Good quality VoIP is not possible over a dial-up modem  
connection.  
Choose the right codec for your location  
1. The default codec is G.729 (8 Kbps), using approximately 25 Kbps  
bandwidth upstream and 25 Kbps bandwidth downstream for each  
call. G.729 provides very good call quality while minimizing  
bandwidth usage.  
2. The G.726 (32 Kbps) codec is a better quality solution compared to  
the G.729 codec. However, it requires more bandwidth per call. A  
G.726 call typically requires 50 Kbps bandwidth upstream and  
50 Kbps bandwidth downstream for each call.  
3. The G.711 (64 Kbps) codec provides the best voice quality. The trade-  
off is the bandwidth requirement. G.711 calls typically require up to  
100 Kbps bandwidth upstream and 100 Kbps bandwidth downstream.  
What happens if the power goes out or if the IP network to VoIP fails?  
To ensure a reliable network connection, all elements of the VoIP network  
should be connected to back-up power supplies (UPS). These elements might  
include LAN switches, routers, firewalls, broadband connection devices (i.e.  
cable modems, DSL modems), and VoIP devices. If the power goes out at the  
Internet Service Provider, then no VoIP calls can be made. Calls can still be  
placed over the regular phone lines.  
Can a firewall prevent VoIP calls from passing through?  
The purpose of a firewall is to control what kind of traffic enters and leaves  
your network. TalkSwitch 48-CVA is designed with embedded applications to  
help traverse firewalls properly. To allow VoIP calls to pass through your  
firewall, you may need to use the port forwarding feature on your firewall.  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA uses the following ports for VoIP:  
Format  
Type Unit 1  
Unit 2  
Unit 3  
Unit 4  
RTP (voice):  
UDP  
UDP  
6000-6006 6010-6016 6020-6026 6030-6036  
SIP  
5060  
(signaling):  
This port is mapped to only the SIP server unit.  
What is SIP?  
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is a signalling protocol used for  
establishing sessions in an IP network. A session could be a simple 2-way  
telephone call or it could be a collaborative multi-media conference session.  
Over the last couple of years, the Voice over IP community has adopted IP as  
its protocol of choice for signalling. IP is an RFC standard (RFC 3261) from  
the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), the body responsible for  
administering and developing the mechanisms that comprise the Internet.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 7 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The IETF’s philosophy is simplicity: specify only what you need to specify. IP  
just initiates, terminates and modifies sessions. In this guide, the term IP is  
often used in place of VoIP.  
TalkSwitch phone systems use the Appello® SIP Stack for VoIP  
communications. The Appello® SIP Stack was developed by TalkSwitch,  
a division of Centrepoint Technologies Inc.  
What is a VPN?  
VPN stands for Virtual Private Network. It is a means of having the  
advantages of a private network on a shared public infrastructure like the  
Internet.  
Can a VPN help to carry data securely over the Internet?  
A VPN provides security by using encryption/decryption. Using a process  
called tunneling, private data is encrypted and encapsulated before being  
sent across the network. The packets of information are sent to their  
destination. Only the ones with the correct protocol information can enter a  
company’s network.  
A VPN is most useful for providing employees with remote access to the  
company network without compromising security. Encryption can have a  
negative impact on the call quality because of the increased overhead on the  
network connection. IPSec adds approximately 10% overhead to VPN traffic.  
What’s the difference between a public IP address and a private  
IP address?  
A public IP address is a globally unique number that identifies a device on  
the Internet. If you want someone on the Internet to connect to you, they  
must know your public address. Also known as your real or external address.  
Private IP addresses are typically assigned to devices on a Local Area  
Network (LAN) and are not routable outside the LAN. Private IP addresses  
are usually in the range 192.168.x.x, 172.16.x.x or 10.x.x.x. These IP  
addresses are used where you have multiple computers all sharing the same  
Internet connection.  
To access the Internet, a computer or VoIP device must have an IP address.  
So what do you do if your ISP (Internet Service Provider) has provided you  
with only one IP address but you have more than one device that requires  
Internet access? The solution is to give each of the devices on the LAN a  
private IP address. A router makes them work by performing Network  
Address Translation (NAT — See the next topic for details).  
Addresses of the form 192.168.x.x, 172.16.x.x or 10.x.x.x are not recognized  
on the Internet and can only be used for private networks. For example, if  
you tell someone on the Internet to connect to you using a 192.168.x.x  
1 7 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
address, it will not work. Instead, you must provide your real/public IP  
address.  
What is NAT and how does it affect VoIP?  
Network Address Translation (NAT) allows multiple devices to share the  
same external IP address to access resources on the Internet. NAT is  
typically used to allow all the devices in a subscriber’s local area network to  
access the Internet through a router with a single public IP address assigned  
by the Internet Service Provider.  
If a VoIP device is sitting behind a NAT, the private IP address assigned to it  
is not usable for communications with the entities outside the private  
network. The VoIP device must substitute the private IP address information  
with the proper external IP address/port in the mapping chosen by the  
underlying NAT to communicate with a particular public peer address/port.  
TalkSwitch can automatically check for the current public IP address and  
substitute the private IP address with the public address so that VoIP traffic  
is properly routed through the NAT.  
What’s the difference between a static IP address and a dynamic  
IP address and what effect does this have on VoIP?  
A static IP address is an address that is permanently assigned to a device.  
Typically, a static IP address has to be assigned by the network  
administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
A dynamic IP address is an address that is temporarily assigned to devices by  
a DHCP or PPP server that maintains and assigns a pool of IP addresses.  
When deploying VoIP devices, it’s best to have a static public IP address.  
This prevents destinations from becoming unreachable for periods of time  
when the IP address changes. But since this can be an expensive option,  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA supports the ability to handle dynamic public IP  
addresses for the Internet connection. TalkSwitch automatically checks for  
the current public IP address and substitutes the private IP address with the  
public address, so that VoIP traffic is properly routed through the NAT.  
What is a IP Proxy and Registrar?  
The basic IP architecture is client/server in nature. The main entities in the  
IP server are the proxy, redirect server and the registrar.  
TalkSwitch 48-CVA has the IP server fully integrated for easy deployment  
and maintenance of your VoIP network. If you are deploying a multi-site  
configuration which can comprise of TalkSwitch 48-CVA units, certified  
third-party gateways and certified third-party IP phones, one TalkSwitch  
48-CVA can act as the IP proxy and registrar. The other IP end-points will  
register with this TalkSwitch 48-CVA and all calls will be negotiated through  
this TalkSwitch48-CVA.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 7 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you first set up your VoIP device (TalkSwitch 48-CVA unit, gateway or  
phone), it will register itself with the TalkSwitch 48-CVA that is configured  
as the IP server so that calls can be directed to your location.  
When you initiate a VoIP call, your device (TalkSwitch 48-CVA unit, gateway  
or phone) will contact the TalkSwitch 48-CVA that is configured as the IP  
server to obtain the contact information for the destination you are trying  
to reach. Once the information is received, the call is established directly  
between your location and the destination. The IP server is no longer  
involved in  
the call.  
If the location of the IP proxy and registrar has a dynamic IP address, you  
have to use the dynamic DNS since the IP server location becomes  
unreachable as soon as the IP address changes.  
What is Dynamic DNS?  
Dynamic DNS is a Domain Name Service used with dynamic IP addresses. DNS  
is used to allow devices to find other devices on the Internet by name rather  
than by IP address. Dynamic DNS allows you to use a Fully Qualified Domain  
Name (FQDN) to locate a device with a dynamic IP address. The FQDN does  
not change. There are companies on the Internet who can provide you with  
a DNS address, even if your IP address changes. Such companies are  
www.dyndns.org, hn.org or www.no-ip.com. Please consult with them how  
to use their service. The basic idea is that you will receive an address like  
myname.homeip.net which points to your IP address (i.e. 209.210.230.140).  
This is important for locations where the IP server resides and where the  
public IP address is dynamic. All other locations will point to this IP server’s  
domain instead of an IP address.  
What is the drawback of using dynamic DNS?  
When DNS records are updated, they have to be sent all over the world so  
that everyone will be aware of the changes. Basically, one DNS server  
connects to another and swaps information. In many cases, the DNS servers  
are updated very quickly. Updates should not take longer than 15 minutes  
to propagate throughout the DNS system. It is possible that propagation  
could take longer due to unforeseen traffic but it shouldn’t take much more  
than an hour at the most.  
How often will my public IP address change?  
This depends on the policies of your Internet Service Provider (ISP, the  
company that provides your Internet access). It can be a matter of days,  
weeks or even months before your IP address changes. A power loss or  
reboot to your cable or DSL modem usually results in the assignment of a  
new IP address.  
1 7 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TalkSwitch has the technology that helps keep this information up to date  
so that the system can function properly after an IP address change has  
been detected and updated.  
What is a port number?  
In an IP address like 64.26.209.103:5060, the port number is 5060, the  
number after the colon.  
Port numbers are required so that a computer or device can support multiple  
applications or streams of simultaneous data communication. Each stream or  
application uses a unique port number. You can think of it like mailing a  
letter to a friend in an apartment building at a specific address. You need to  
specify the apartment number as well as the address of the building, so that  
the mail can reach the correct final destination.  
V O I P I N F O R M A T I O N  
1 7 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.6 VOIP NETWORK ADMINISTRATION FORM  
Use this form to keep track of phone numbers assigned to units that are part  
of a TalkSwitch VoIP network.  
SIP server location________________________________________________  
Equipment at SIP server location:____________________________________  
VoIP phone numbers assigned to SIP server location:____________________  
Telephone numbers assigned to unit  
Location name  
Equipment  
VoIP phone number(s)  
We trust that your TalkSwitch phone system will provide exceptional  
features, performance and value to your business. Should you have any  
further questions, please contact your authorized TalkSwitch reseller. If  
you purchased directly from TalkSwitch,  
visit www.talkswitch.com/support or call  
1.866.393.9960 (North America).  
We welcome your feedback, comments and suggestions. Please e-mail us  
at [email protected] or write us at TalkSwitch, 1545 Carling Avenue,  
Suite 510, Ottawa, ON Canada K1Z 8P9.  
1 8 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C H A P T E R 6  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND  
SUPPORT  
6.1 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Solutions to the following problems are described in this chapter:  
Problems that may occur during configuration  
Problems that may occur while using the TalkSwitch features  
Some problems might be due to physical connections such as loose cables.  
Before you start to analyze possible configuration issues. See 1.13 Verifying  
6.1.1 Problems that may occur during configuration  
I am not able to retrieve settings from TalkSwitch.  
Reboot TalkSwitch.  
On the TalkSwitch front panel, turn the power button off and back on.  
If you are connected via Serial port, open the configuration software.  
This will often correct any miscommunication that may have occurred  
between TalkSwitch and your PC.  
Make sure you do not have any communications programs running at the  
same time you are using the TalkSwitch configuration software. These  
can include Palm Pilot, Hot Sync, TalkWorks, digital camera software or  
others. These programs tend to occupy COM ports, making them  
unavailable for other programs.  
I am unable to configure TalkSwitch using a touchtone phone.  
1. You cannot configure TalkSwitch using a phone sharing the same line in  
parallel. You have to configure TalkSwitch using one of the extensions  
plugged into the back panel of TalkSwitch.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D S U P P O R T  
1 8 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. You cannot configure TalkSwitch using touchtone keypad commands  
while the TalkSwitch configuration software is open. If the software is  
closed and you hear the prompt “I’m sorry, TalkSwitch is currently being  
configured”, reboot TalkSwitch by turning the power off and then back  
on. Wait until the lights stop flashing and the Data light is on solid.  
If you are using a local extension, check if the extension has Direct Line  
Access to your telephone lines. If Direct Line Access is enabled, press  
Flash on an analog phone or  
internal dial tone. Press  
on a IP phone to receive an  
to enter command mode. Enter the correct  
* *  
#
password, if you have password protection.  
From an out-of-office phone, call into TalkSwitch and wait for the  
#
the auto attendant. Dial  
or  
55 to enter command mode. Enter  
*
the correct password, if you have password protection.  
6.1.2 Problems that may occur while using the TalkSwitch features  
6.1.2.1 The auto attendant  
The auto attendant does not play when calls come in.  
Check if the line light on an incoming call is flickering while the phone  
is ringing. If not, replace the phone cord.  
Make sure you have an auto attendant message recorded.  
Check the mode TalkSwitch is currently running.  
Open the configuration software. In the lower right part of the  
About TalkSwitch window, check what it says for Current Mode.  
Select Call Handling -> Telephone Lines.  
On an incoming call during mode: change the mode if necessary.  
Set the auto attendant to answer immediately.  
The auto attendant message is broken up or very faint.  
Open the configuration software.  
Select Options -> Audio Controls.  
Adjust the Line Controls volume setting.  
The quality of the microphone in the telephone handset that you used to  
record your auto attendant can affect the quality of your recording. Try  
recording the auto attendant from another extension/telephone.  
The auto attendant answers calls before any of the extensions ring.  
If TalkSwitch users wish to have their local extensions ring before the auto  
attendant picks up incoming calls, do the following:  
Open the configuration software.  
Select Call Handling -> Telephone Lines.  
Click the checkbox(es) in the section Extensions to ring on an incoming  
call before the Auto Attendant answers.  
Increase the number of rings.  
1 8 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The auto attendant is transferring calls to the wrong extension.  
Check if the extension jacks of your devices (phones, faxes) are plugged  
into the corresponding jacks on the TalkSwitch back panel (i.e. extension  
111 is plugged into E1).  
The auto attendant answers calls, but does not transfer them to  
the extensions.  
Make sure your extensions are plugged into the extension jacks on the  
back panel of TalkSwitch (instead of your telephone wall jacks).  
Open the configuration software.  
Select Call Handling -> Auto Attendant.  
In the At the Auto Attendant, perform the following actions section, check  
if the options that the caller can select are pointing to the correct  
extensions.  
6.1.2.2 Music on hold  
Callers hear the “One moment please” message and then total silence  
when the auto attendant transfers their call to an extension.  
There is a problem with the music source. Check all connections and  
the power.  
Callers hear only silence when put on hold at an extension.  
Make sure you use the Flash or Link button on an analog phone, or the  
Hold button on a IP phone, to put callers on hold. If you use the Hold  
button on an analog phone, callers will be placed on hold at the phone  
itself and not through TalkSwitch.  
You have enabled the music on hold feature, but have not attached an  
audio device to the music jack on TalkSwitch.  
You have enabled play the Play music from file feature but have not  
loaded a .wav music file to TalkSwitch.  
6.1.2.3 Call routing with local extensions and home phones  
Callers are disconnected when transferring calls from one extension  
to another.  
If you are using the hook switch rather than the Flash button to put  
callers on hold, you may be holding the hook switch down too long  
and disconnect.  
I can’t use my conference/3-way calling feature from the  
phone company.  
You need to make sure you have checked the box indicating that you  
have 3-way calling or transfer and clear on the appropriate lines under  
System Information -> Telephone Lines in the configuration software.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D S U P P O R T  
1 8 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I’m unable to place intercom calls from a local extension.  
If the local extension has been set up for Direct Line Access to your  
telephone lines, you need to press Flash on an analog phone, or  
on a IP phone, before intercom calling.  
* *  
6.1.2.4 Answering and fax machines  
The answering machine and/or fax machine picks up calls before they  
can be answered by telephone extensions.  
Check your settings under Call Handling -> Telephone Lines in the  
configuration software. Your fax machine and/or answering machine  
extension may be set to answer calls at the same time as your telephone  
extensions. To fix this problem, remove the fax or answering machine  
extension from the list of extensions to ring on an incoming call.  
Incoming faxes are not automatically detected and routed to the  
fax machine.  
ensure that you selected the correct extension for the field labeled if a  
fax call is detected, under Call Handling -> Auto Attendant in the  
configuration software.  
Not all fax machines emit a CNG tone that TalkSwitch can detect and  
route. Therefore, you may consider incorporating an additional method of  
fax routing. This could include the use of a dedicated fax line or a  
distinctive ring number.  
Many fax machines/modems will time-out or disconnect after 25 seconds  
on average if they have not connected with another fax machine/modem.  
If you clicked the checkbox next to After the Auto Attendant has finished  
playing and no selection has been made within, under Call Handling ->  
Auto Attendant, the fax call may time-out before it reaches your fax  
extension. If you have a long auto attendant message, you may want to  
shorten it or use another fax routing option.  
The level of the auto attendant is too loud and is overpowering the CNG  
tone, affecting the detection. Try lowering the volume level of the  
auto attendant.  
6.1.2.5 Other possible local extension problems  
I am unable to access TalkSwitch lines with a local extension.  
Check your Direct Line Access settings under System Information ->  
Local Extension in the configuration software. If a local extension has  
not been given Direct Line Access to your telephone lines, you must dial  
9 or 81-88 to access a line.  
Check if Activate Automatic Route Selection is enabled under System  
Information-> Auto Route Selection. ARS can re-direct or block calls  
1 8 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
My PC (internal or external) modem cannot dial out.  
If Direct Line Access to telephone lines is not enabled on the extension  
where your modem is connected, you will have to include a line hunt  
group prefix (9 or 81-88) before the dialing the modem number.  
One of the local extensions (telephones) does not ring.  
Some telephones require more voltage in order to ring. These phones are  
usually the older ‘Bell’ phones with mechanical ringers. These phones  
should not be used as TalkSwitch extensions.  
Make sure the telephone cord you are using between the phone and  
TalkSwitch is working properly.  
Enure that the ringer is turned on.  
Extension(s) ring, but there is no caller.  
This can occur when a caller hangs up after the auto attendant has  
begun to play. In some areas, the telephone company’s disconnect/clear  
signal is weak. The auto attendant may not be able to pick up the  
disconnect signal as soon as a caller hangs up. The auto attendant will  
not receive a response after playing its message and the call will fall  
through to your settings for After the Auto Attendant has finished playing  
and no selection has been made within, under Call Handling -> Auto  
Attendant,  
When I try to access voicemail, I hear a busy tone.  
Check your Direct Line Access settings under System Information ->  
Local Extensions in the configuration software. If a local extension has  
been given Direct Line Access to your telephone lines, you must first  
press Flash on an analog phone, or  
on a IP phone, before  
* *  
dialing the mailbox. The same applies for dialing other extensions to  
initiate intercom calls.  
6.1.2.6 Multiple TalkSwitch units connected to the same LAN  
I can’t reach an extension across the LAN.  
Make sure the other unit is connected to the LAN and powered on.  
Pick up a local extension belonging to the other unit. If you hear a dial  
tone, check your LAN connections. On the rear panel, the top LED of  
the three LEDs next to the LAN port should be on. If there is no dial tone,  
make sure the unit is powered on.  
The configuration does not show the other TalkSwitch unit(s).  
Check your LAN connections. Are you able to communicate with another  
extension on the other unit?  
Check the unit ID of each unit. If the lights on one or more units are  
flashing, there is a conflict with the unit ID numbers assigned to each  
TalkSwitch unit. Connect a phone to each TalkSwitch unit and lift the  
handset. It will tell you immediately if a unit ID number needs to be  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D S U P P O R T  
1 8 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
#
#
assigned. Follow the instructions. You can dial  
00  
to check the  
unit ID of the unit you are connected to. Click the System Information  
link in the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
After recording an auto attendant greeting, I can’t play it back.  
After recording an auto attendant on one of the TalkSwitch units, it will  
copy it to other TalkSwitch units on the LAN. During this process, you  
cannot listen to that particular auto attendant. Try again in a few  
minutes.  
Calls are not always reaching my voicemail.  
When the system is in high use, all channels across the LAN might be in  
use, so that calls cannot be transferred to extensions or voicemail. If this  
situation happens frequently, consider optimizing the way the system  
uses the lines under System Information -> Line Hunt Groups in the  
configuration software. Click the checkbox next to For all Hunt Groups,  
hunt lines on same unit first. Also, ensure that frequently used  
extensions are connected to units with enough lines out to reduce  
LAN traffic.  
Example: You have two TalkSwitch units, six lines and 12 employees.  
The Six lines have the hunt/rollover service from the phone company.  
Suggested setup: Plug the four highest traffic lines into unit 1. Also,  
connect the eight highest phone usage employee extensions to unit 1.  
Connect the remaining lines and extensions to unit 2. Under System  
Information -> Line Hunt Groups in the configuration software, make  
sure you have the For all Hunt Groups, hunt lines on same unit first  
checkbox enabled. This arrangement keeps most of the traffic on unit 1  
and any outbound calls made from any extension will go out on the same  
unit the extension is connected to. This also applies for inbound calls  
that are forwarded to remote extensions. The call will be forwarded out  
on a line belonging to the same unit that the call came in on. The call  
will only be forwarded on the other TalkSwitch unit if no line on that  
first unit is available.  
Calls across the LAN are lower in volume.  
Check the line gain levels under Options -> Audio Controls in the  
configuration software. You may need to increase the line gain levels on  
one or more lines to compensate for high loss lines. If these controls are  
set incorrectly and your lines are problematic, you may hear an echo  
when calls are made across the LAN.  
1 8 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problems that may occur with VoIP  
I hear a re-order tone when I try to dial a VoIP location.  
Confirm the number dialed is actually part of the VoIP group (i.e.  
registered with the same proxy/registrar server as your TalkSwitch CVA,  
IP gateway or IP phone is registered with.  
Check that TalkSwitch has all proper settings in the IP configuration and  
VoIP configuration pages.  
Verify that the number you are dialing is registered with your TS proxy  
registrar. Go to System Information -> VoIP Configuration and click  
the View Registrar Entries button.  
Contact TalkSwitch for help at 888.332.9322.  
Callers complain the sound is distorted or choppy.  
Your broadband connection may not have enough upstream bandwidth to  
support many simultaneous VoIP calls. Under Options -> Audio  
Controls, you may need to disable the G.711 and G.726 codecs and only  
use G.729.  
You may have too much data traffic on your Internet connection at the  
same time you are trying to make voice calls. We suggest that you use a  
router that supports QoS (Quality of Service) for VoIP.  
When I call someone or they call me, voice is only heard in  
one direction.  
The cause of this problem is usually a result of a router being  
misconfigured with respect to port mappings. Ensure all required VoIP  
ports are mapped to your TalkSwitch unit. Also, ensure you use a static  
private IP address when connected to your router as this can also affect  
port mappings from the firewall/router.  
Use a router that supports the UPnP.  
For more VoIP information, visit our support section at  
www.talkswitch.com/support.  
6.2 SUPPORT  
If you are having problems with the configuration or operation of  
TalkSwitch, please read this section. If you don’t find the solution to your  
problem here, check the FAQ section located in the support area at our  
website at http://www.talkswitch.com/support. Select your TalkSwitch  
model and click Continue.  
If you require further assistance, do one of the following:  
1. Contact your TalkSwitch dealer.  
2. Contact our customer support department by e-mail:  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D S U P P O R T  
1 8 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Call a technical support specialist at TalkSwitch:  
1-866-393-9960 (continental North America) or 613-725-2466  
weekdays between 9:00 a.m. and 8:00 p.m. EST.  
Please have the following information available when you call:  
a) Your e-mail address and telephone number.  
b) The serial number located on the bottom of TalkSwitch.  
c) Your date of purchase.  
d) The number of telephone lines that you have connected  
to TalkSwitch.  
e) The telephone company services that you are using with TalkSwitch.  
f) Your PC’s operating system (e.g. Windows 95, 98, ME, 2000, XP).  
1 8 8  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
A P P E N D I X A  
APPENDIX A: FUNCTIONS AND COMMANDS  
FUNCTIONS AND COMMANDS  
About functions and commands  
The following tables list numbers, functions and commands you can enter.  
The first part lists all the possible analog, IP, remote and ring group  
extensions as well as VoIP numbers and general voice mailbox numbers.  
Following are tables listing functions that can be entered from local and  
outside phones and at the auto attendant. The last table is a list of  
commands you can enter in command mode.  
Extension numbers  
Unit 1  
Unit 2  
Unit 3  
Unit 4  
Local analog/IP 111–118  
extensions  
121–128  
131–138  
141–148  
Remote  
210–219  
220–229  
230–239  
240–249  
extensions  
Extension  
Ring Group  
300–309  
There are 10 ring groups for the entire  
system.  
Other 3-digit numbers  
VoIP location  
numbers  
250–299  
There are 50 external VoIP numbers.  
General voice  
mailboxes  
410–419  
420–429  
430–439  
440–449  
A P P E N D I X  
A
1 8 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Functions you can access from local extensions  
Keys  
Function performed  
Flash/Hold  
If you are connected to a caller, Flash/Hold puts the  
call on hold and you hear the internal dial tone.  
Flash/Hold  
Pressing Flash/Hold again at the internal dial tone  
retrieves the most recent call on hold.  
Flash/Hold at  
When you are connected to an outside line, pressing  
external dial tone Flash/Hold switches you to the internal dial tone.  
On a regular phone, press Flash. On an IP phone, press Hold.  
and  
Dials into a local, remote or general voice mailbox to  
leave a message.  
*
mailbox number  
(local, remote or  
general voicemail)  
and  
Accesses voicemail of a local, remote or general  
voice mailbox. You can retrieve messages, change  
greetings, password, etc.  
* *  
mailbox number  
(local, remote or  
general voicemail)  
#
Accesses the mailbox(es) associated with your  
extension.  
* *  
Flash/Hold 4  
Completes a transfer and returns to the internal  
dial tone.  
On a regular phone, press Flash 4. On an IP phone, press Hold 4 followed by  
#
Dial, Send or  
to complete the transfer.  
0
External PA access to make an announcement through  
the attached external PA system.  
*
Flash/Hold 5  
Disconnects the current caller and reconnects to the last  
caller on hold.  
A conference-call initiator can disengage the second  
conferenced party by pressing Flash 5.  
Flash/Hold  
There are 10 parking spots for the entire system.  
Press Flash/Hold to place a call on hold and dial  
500–509  
*
500–509 to assign a parking spot (park orbit).  
*
1 9 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
510  
Parks a call automatically in the first available parking  
spot, starting at 500. Press Flash/Hold and 510 to  
place a caller in the next available parking spot (park  
*
*
orbit).  
Retrieves a parked call.  
Dial from a local extension to pick up a parked call.  
5*00–5*09  
Flash/Hold 6  
Conference call for 3 parties.  
Press Flash to put the first caller on hold, dial another  
extension or external number and press Flash 6.  
60  
61  
62  
Disables Do Not Disturb at the current extension.  
Enables Do Not Disturb at the current extension.  
Toggles (enables/disables) Do Not Disturb at the  
current extension.  
*
*
*
7 and  
extension  
Call pick-up at a specific extension.  
*
Dial from dial tone to pick up a call ringing at  
another extension.  
Flash/Hold 7  
80  
Press Flash 7 to cycle through queued calls on a  
first in/first out basis.  
Accesses Same Line Connect when transferring an  
outside caller to another outside number.  
9, 81–88  
Dial to access an outside line.  
#
On an IP phone, press Dial, Send or  
after your entry for the following  
options:  
80  
Enable play music source through PA output.  
*
*
84 and  
extension  
Hands-free intercom call to an extension, automatically  
answered in speaker mode, enabling instant hands-free  
2-way communication (for supported sets).  
85 and  
extension or  
Page a phone at an extension or the phones of a  
ring group.  
*
ring group number  
88 and  
account code  
Attach account code to Call Detail Record (CDR)  
for last call.  
*
9
Call pick-up of any ringing line.  
Enters command mode.  
*
#
or  
55  
*
A P P E N D I X  
A
1 9 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Functions you can access from outside phones  
The list below shows the digits you can dial after the auto attendant  
answers.  
Keys  
0
Function performed  
Performs the action defined in the auto attendant  
for details).  
3-digit local ext. Rings at the local extension (i.e. 111). See Extension  
3-digit  
Rings at the local extension (i.e. 211). See Extension  
remote ext.  
300–309  
Extension Ring  
Rings all the extensions in the ring groups. There are 10  
ring groups for the entire system.  
Groups  
1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 Performs the action defined in the auto attendant  
configuration (see 2.4.2 Auto attendant on page 80 for  
details).  
6
Enters call back configuration (see 2.5 Call Back/Call  
Bridge on page 98 for details).  
7 and  
extension  
Transfers a caller on hold to another phone system used  
in conjunction with TalkSwitch. As soon as the call  
connects to the other system, it disconnects from  
TalkSwitch.  
9 and 81–88  
Accesses line hunt groups for call bridge and is protected  
with the administrator password.  
80  
Accesses the call bridge feature using Same Line Connect  
Requires 3–way calling/conference on the line.  
and  
Dials into a local, remote or general voice mailbox to  
*
extension (local, leave a message.  
remote or general  
voicemail)  
and  
Accesses voicemail of a local, remote or general  
* *  
mailbox number voice mailbox. You can retrieve messages, change  
(local, remote or greetings, password, etc.  
general voicemail)  
1 9 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X B  
APPENDIX B: TALKSWITCH AND TELEPHONE COMPANY CALLING SERVICES  
TALKSWITCH AND TELEPHONE  
COMPANY CALLING SERVICES  
Many of the calling services offered by your local telephone company are  
compatible with and enhanced by TalkSwitch’s capabilities.  
Caller ID (Call Display) — Displays the telephone number and name  
associated with an incoming call.  
TalkSwitch is capable of regenerating the caller ID and passing the  
information to its local extensions when incoming calls are transferred by  
the auto attendant. TalkSwitch regenerates the caller ID and passes it only  
to the selected local extension. If a local extension is configured to ring at  
least twice before the auto attendant answers, TalkSwitch will pass the  
caller ID information to that extension. If a call is transferred from one  
extension to another, the caller ID information will also be passed on.  
TalkSwitch can use the caller ID’s time stamp to set its internal clock.  
Distinctive Ring — The ability to have more than one telephone number  
that callers can dial to reach the same telephone line. Distinctive ring is also  
referred to as: Ident-A-Ring; Ident-A-Call; Ring Master; Teen Service; Double  
Number; Personal Ringing; Ring Plus; Smart Ring Service; Special Ring; or  
Customized Ringing.  
TalkSwitch can detect distinctive ring telephone numbers and use them to  
route incoming calls automatically. TalkSwitch gives you the ability to use  
two distinctive ring telephone numbers on all lines. Distinctive ring  
numbers on TalkSwitch lines also have access to the auto attendant and all  
other TalkSwitch call routing features.  
A P P E N D I X  
B
1 9 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The TalkSwitch distinctive ring call routing features can be used in a number  
of ways:  
Routing fax/modem calls  
Routing voice messaging  
Separating home office calls  
Using auto call back  
Each distinctive ring number has a distinctive ring cadence or ring sequence  
that allows you to identify the number that was dialed.  
Voicemail (Call Answer) — A service which gives callers the opportunity to  
leave a message when your phone line is busy or unanswered. TalkSwitch  
can work in conjunction with your telephone company’s voicemail service.  
Call Waiting — If you are already on the phone, the call waiting service will  
emit a soft beeping sound to let you know you have another call waiting to  
be answered.  
To talk to the other caller when you hear a call waiting beep, press the Flash  
button twice. To return to the other caller, you will need to press the Flash  
button twice again. This service is not recommended, since TalkSwitch  
cannot answer the second call while the first call is already being routed by  
the auto attendant.  
3-Way Calling/Conference — The 3-way calling/conference service allows  
you to add a third party to a call already in progress.  
The 3-way calling/conference service enhances TalkSwitch capabilities  
whether you have one or more telephone lines. Using a 3-way calling/  
conference service gives you access to the TalkSwitch call forwarding, call  
back and call bridge features.  
Centrex/Plexar Transfer — The Centrex transfer service is similar in  
function to the 3-way calling/conference service. The primary difference is  
that two external parties can still remain in conversation after you hang up.  
TalkSwitch can disconnect after the transfer if you have this service and  
have enabled the Transfer and clear option under Option -> Miscellaneous  
in the TalkSwitch configuration software.  
Using one telephone line with Centrex transfer service gives you access to  
the TalkSwitch call forwarding, call back and call bridge features.  
Hunt or Rollover — When using two or more lines, calls coming in on a  
busy line can be rolled over to an available line in a hunt pattern that you  
can set. There are two types of hunting — sequential and circular.  
Sequential hunting starts at the number dialed and ends in the last number  
in the assigned group. Circular hunting hunts all the lines in the hunting  
1 9 4  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
group, regardless of the starting point. (It will only circle once through the  
hunt group).  
TalkSwitch has the same functionality available on all lines and can work in  
conjunction with the hunt and rollover services.  
Call Hold and Flash  
TalkSwitch detects Flash from regular phones to put calls on hold. A flash  
signal is produced by pressing the Flash or Link button on your telephone  
(Link is another name for Flash). If you do not have these buttons on your  
telephone, you can produce a flash signal by quickly depressing and  
releasing the telephone’s hang-up hook.  
Single-Flash — is pressing the Flash or Link button once. You can also  
depress and release the telephone’s hang-up hook once.  
Double-Flash — is pressing the Flash or Link button twice. You can also  
depress and release the telephone’s hang-up hook twice. When using your  
telephone’s hang-up hook to initiate a double-flash, do not try to initiate  
the second flash too quickly or you may disconnect your caller.  
Press and release the hang-up hook once, count to 2, then initiate the  
second flash.  
When would you use double-flash?  
1. If TalkSwitch is connected to any other system/service that uses flash to  
activate its features (e.g. a Key Telephone System, PBX, or telephone line  
with the Centrex service from your phone company).  
2. If you are using any of your local telephone company services that are  
activated with flash (e.g. call waiting, 3-way calling/conference, etc.).  
What does single and double-flash do?  
TalkSwitch and the above-mentioned systems/services use flash to activate  
their calling features. TalkSwitch therefore needs a way to tell which (or  
whose) features you want to access when you press the Flash button.  
Using a single-flash: places the caller on hold. (The flash signal is not passed  
to the CO line, solving problems associated with flash causing a hang-up at  
some CO).  
Using a double-flash: the first flash places the caller on hold, and the  
second flash (if pressed within 2 seconds) tells TalkSwitch to pass a flash to  
the CO line to activate the intended CO or PBX feature.  
A P P E N D I X  
B
1 9 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X C  
APPENDIX C: TALKSWITCH AND POWER INTERRUPTIONS  
TALKSWITCH AND POWER  
INTERRUPTIONS  
TalkSwitch settings and configurations  
In the event of a power failure, your TalkSwitch settings and configurations  
will not be lost.  
The TalkSwitch configuration is stored in non-volatile memory. Non-volatile  
memory means that your feature settings (configurations) remain in the  
TalkSwitch memory despite interruptions in the power supply.  
Calling features  
In the event of a power failure, TalkSwitch features or capabilities,  
including VoIP will be unavailable except for local extension 114. You can  
make or receive calls on Line 1. When the power is restored, all TalkSwitch  
features and capabilities will be re-established.  
Mode scheduling and power interruptions  
When the power supply to TalkSwitch has been interrupted, TalkSwitch’s  
internal clock will continue to run for up to 12 hours. If you have enabled  
the automatic mode scheduling feature and it has been longer than 12  
hours, TalkSwitch will not function properly until the internal clock is reset  
via a caller ID call or with the TalkSwitch configuration software. When  
power is restored to TalkSwitch, it will check the time and determine the  
mode it should be running according to the configuration and set itself to  
that mode.  
To check the current mode of operation:  
#
1. Dial  
at a local extension to enter command mode and enter a  
password if required.  
#
2. Dial 30  
. TalkSwitch will report the current mode.  
A P P E N D I X  
C
1 9 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X D  
APPENDIX D: SAFETY AND REGULATORY INFORMATION  
SAFETY AND REGULATORY  
INFORMATION  
Safety precautions  
Before using TalkSwitch, please review and ensure the following safety  
instructions are adhered to:  
1. Read, follow and retain instructions — All safety and operating  
instructions should be read, followed and retained for future reference  
before operating the equipment.  
2. Heed warnings — All warnings on the equipment and in the operating  
instructions should be adhered to.  
3. Temperature — Do not operate in environments where the temperature is  
below 0°C or 32°F. If the product was shipped in cold weather, please let  
the system warm up at room temperature for at least two hours before  
plugging it in to a power outlet.  
4. Moisture — Do not place TalkSwitch in a high-humidity environment.  
5. Heat — Never place TalkSwitch near heat sources such as radiators, floor  
registers or in direct sunlight. Do not stack units on top of each other.  
6. Power supply — The equipment should only be connected to an approved  
power supply of the type described in the operating instructions or  
marked on the equipment. Use only the power adapter supplied with  
TalkSwitch.  
A P P E N D I X  
D
1 9 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Damage requiring service — Do not attempt to service the TalkSwitch  
yourself. Unplug TalkSwitch and refer servicing to a licensed technician  
when:  
The plug or power cord has been damaged.  
TalkSwitch has been exposed to moisture.  
TalkSwitch does not appear to be operating properly or exhibits a  
marked change in performance.  
Important Notices  
FCC and IC Warnings  
This equipment complies with ACTA TIA/EIA/IS-968A and Part 68 of the  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules in the United States. It also  
complies with regulations RSS210 and CS-03 of Industry Canada and Science  
Canada. This equipment also complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, as well  
as ICES003 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation of the device.  
FCC Part 15  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
“CLASS B” Digital Device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits  
are designed to provide a reasonable protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with  
these instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio com-  
munications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur  
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different to that which  
the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced Radio/TV technician for help.  
This CLASS B Digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian  
interference-causing equipment regulations.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by TalkSwitch could  
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
2 0 0  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACTA TIA/EIA/IS-968A, FCC Part 68 and IC CS-03  
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This  
certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network  
protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the  
appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The  
department does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the  
user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible  
to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company.  
The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of  
connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative  
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to  
this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecom-  
munications company cause to request the user to disconnect the  
equipment.  
Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground  
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water  
pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be  
particularly important in rural areas.  
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves,  
but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or  
electrician, as appropriate.  
A label is located on the underside of the base unit containing both the  
FCC registration number and Ringer Equivalency Number (REN) or the IC  
registration number and Load Number. You must, upon request, provide this  
information to your local telephone company.  
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected  
to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in  
the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all  
areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5). To be certain of the  
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the  
total RENs, contact the local telephone company.  
This equipment is compatible with inductively-coupled hearing aids.  
A P P E N D I X  
D
2 0 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service  
If you are experiencing difficulty with your Model: CT-TS001.1 telephone  
equipment, please contact your reseller for repair and/or warranty  
information. See Appendix E: TalkSwitch One-Year Limited Warranty and  
Return Policy for more information.  
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone  
company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem  
is corrected.  
This equipment cannot be used on public coin telephone services provided  
by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to  
state tariffs.  
The FCC requires that you connect your cordless telephone to the nation-  
wide telephone network through a modular telephone jack (USOC, RF11C,  
RJ11W, or RJ14).  
Your telephone company may discontinue your service if your equipment  
causes harm to the telephone network. They will notify you in advance of  
disconnection, if possible. During notification, you will be informed of your  
right to file a complaint to the FCC.  
Occasionally, your telephone company may make changes in its facilities,  
equipment, operation, or procedures that could affect the operation of your  
equipment. If so, you will be given advance notice of the change to give you  
an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.  
2 0 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X E  
APPENDIX E: TALKSWITCH ONE-YEAR WARRANTY AND RETURN POLICY  
TALKSWITCH ONE-YEAR  
WARRANTY AND RETURN  
POLICY  
Condition: The original end-user customer acknowledges that he or she  
has read the limited One-Year Warranty and Warranty Disclaimers and  
understands the same and agrees to be bound by its terms and  
conditions.  
TalkSwitch, a division of Centrepoint Technologies Inc. (“TalkSwitch”)  
warrants to the original end-user customer (“Customer”) that each new  
TalkSwitch product shall be substantially free from defects in materials and  
workmanship under normal use for a period of one (1) year from the date of  
the original purchase (proof of purchase required). The exclusive remedy  
and entire liability under this warranty will be for repair or replacement on  
a like-for-like basis at TalkSwitch’s option.  
The above warranty shall not apply to product defects resulting from  
(a) improper maintenance or installation; (b) misuse, neglect or accident;  
(c) damage from moisture or corrosive environments; (d) use of the power  
adapter with supply voltages other than that for which it is specified;  
(e) static discharges; (f) high voltage surges; (g) electrostatic discharges;  
(h) operation outside the product’s specification; or (i) failure to follow  
product instructions.  
The warranty is void where (a) the serial number has been altered, removed  
or effaced; or (b) the product has been used in an application, country,  
region, locality, or connected to any network, other than those for which  
the product was intended to operate.  
A P P E N D I X  
E
2 0 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TalkSwitch shall not have any obligation to repair or replace product until  
the Customer returns defective product to TalkSwitch. Any replacement  
product may be either new or like-new, and may contain remanufactured  
parts, equivalent to new in performance.  
EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE, AND TO THE  
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE PRODUCTS AND STORAGE  
MEDIA ARE SUPPLIED ON AN “AS IS” BASIS AND THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES,  
REPRESENTATIONS OR CONDITIONS WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,  
WRITTEN OR ORAL, ARISING BY STATUTE, OPERATION OF LAW, COURSE OF  
DEALING, USAGE OF TRADE OR OTHERWISE, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT.  
TALKSWITCH SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR  
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, DURABILITY,  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL TALKSWITCH BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST  
PROFITS, LOST DATA, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE  
DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, NEGLIGENCE), OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER OR NOT  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR WHETHER SUCH  
DAMAGES ARE FORSEEABLE. IN ANY EVENT, THE TOTAL AGGREGATE  
LIABILITY OF TALKSWITCH FOR DIRECT DAMAGES SHALL NOT EXCEED THE  
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT.  
This warranty gives specific rights, and Customer may have other rights  
subject to jurisdiction. To the extent any part of this limited warranty  
statement is inconsistent with such local law, that part shall be deemed  
modified to be consistent with such local law.  
DOC Compliance  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise  
emissions for digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference  
Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.  
The FCC Statement is located in Appendix D: Safety Precautions and  
Regulatory Information”.  
Warranty Service  
To be eligible to obtain warranty service you must retain proof of purchase  
and contact your reseller for warranty details. If you fail to provide proof  
of purchase, your reseller and TalkSwitch, a division of Centrepoint  
Technologies Inc. (“TalkSwitch”) will not be able to provide you with any  
kind of warranty service.  
2 0 4  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To obtain warranty service, products must be sent to your reseller or a  
service facility designated by TalkSwitch. The original end-user purchaser  
shall pay all shipping charges, duties and taxes for products sent to  
TalkSwitch for warranty service. TalkSwitch shall pay for return of the  
product to the end-user purchaser.  
If purchased from a reseller:  
Contact your reseller and obtain a Warranty Return Authorization (WRA)  
number if required.  
If purchased from TalkSwitch:  
Please contact the Technical Support department at TalkSwitch to obtain a  
WRA number — (866) 393-9960 toll free in continental North America or  
(613) 725-2466. Please have your model and serial number available when  
you call.  
If the product is being shipped from outside of Canada, the following  
statement must be included on the package:  
Canadian Goods Being Returned to Canada.  
Failure to obtain a WRA number and include the necessary information  
will result in the package being refused.  
A P P E N D I X  
E
2 0 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X F  
APPENDIX F: SPECIFICATIONS  
SPECIFICATIONS  
System  
24-CA  
48-CA  
48-CVA  
Analog trunks  
2
0
4
0
1
1
4
0
8
4
4
8
VoIP trunks  
Analog extension interfaces  
LAN interface  
RJ-45 Ethernet  
USB interface  
1
1
1
1
Serial interface (RS-232, 9-pin)  
Memory expansion  
Music input  
1, 3, 4.5 and 9 hour memory cards  
Phono jack (1/8" mono) or stored .wav file  
Phono jack (1/8" mono) or stored .wav file  
120 VAC, 60 Hz — In/16 VAC, 1.5 A — Out  
PA output  
Power source  
Power-failure line to  
extension jacks  
Extension 4 connects to Line 1  
VoIP features (models with VoIP trunks only)  
Embedded SIP server and user agents  
Integrated registrar  
Can use external SIP servers as required  
RTP  
G.711µ-law/A-law, G.726 (32 Kbps), G.729a  
G.168 echo cancellation  
VAD, silence suppression  
Adaptive jitter buffer  
Packet loss concealment  
Fax tone detection  
A P P E N D I X  
F
2 0 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog extension interface  
Trunk type  
Loop start  
Connector type  
Interface impedance  
Loop range  
RJ-11, 2-pin  
600 ohms  
0–600 ohms  
Yes  
Hook flash supported  
On-hook voltage  
35 volts  
Off-hook loop voltage  
source  
35 volts  
Off-hook loop currant  
Dial tone level  
23 mA to 40 mA  
-2.4 dBm  
Ringing voltage  
90 volts RMS  
20 Hz – True sine wave  
5 REN  
Ringing frequency  
Total ringing load  
Analog trunks  
Connector type  
Trunk type  
RJ-11, 4-pin  
Loop start  
Configurable, 600 ohms, 600 complex, 900 ohms,  
900 complex  
Interface impedance  
Ringing impedance  
Ringing sensitively  
REN  
3,900 ohms  
45 volts RMS @ 20 Hz  
0.78  
Longitudinal balance  
Signal level  
69 dB  
-10 dB  
Yes  
Distinctive ring supported  
Caller ID support  
FSK, all lines  
Dimensions (H x W x L)  
Metric  
51.6 mm x 203.2 mm x 213.4 mm  
2.03" x 8" x 8.4"  
Imperial  
Weight  
24-CA  
48-CA  
48-CVA  
Metric  
0.64 kg  
0.88 kg  
0.90 kg  
Imperial  
1.41 lbs  
1.94 lbs  
1.98 lbs  
Regulatory Approvals  
ACTA TIA/EIA/IS-968A and FCC Part 68, Industry Canada CS-03,  
FCC Part 15B, Industry Canada ICES-003.  
Power adapter complies with UL and CSA  
2 0 8  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X G  
APPENDIX G: COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING NOTICES  
COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING  
NOTICES  
TalkSwitch copyright © 2006 — All Rights reserved.  
TalkSwitch is a division of Centrepoint Technologies Inc.  
TalkSwitch software is protected under copyright law and international  
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of TalkSwitch software,  
or any portion of it, in any form, may result in severe civil and criminal  
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent of the law.  
TalkSwitch phone systems use the Appello® SIP stack for VoIP  
communications. The Appello® SIP stack was developed by TalkSwitch — a  
division of Centrepoint Technologies Inc.  
TalkSwitch and Appello are registered trademarks of Centrepoint  
Technologies Inc.  
Elements of TalkSwitch software are protected under additional copyrights  
listed below, and subject to the terms and disclaimers listed below.  
A) Copyright © 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.  
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its  
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided  
that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that  
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting  
documentation, and that the name of MIT not be used in advertising or  
publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written  
prior permission. MIT makes no representations about the suitability of this  
software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied  
warranty.  
B) Copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
A P P E N D I X  
G
2 0 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may  
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  
without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND  
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT  
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
C) Copyright © 2001-2003 Swedish Institute of Computer Science.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT  
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
2 1 0  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D) Copyright © 1991-1992, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991.  
All rights reserved.  
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as  
the “RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material  
mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also granted  
to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as  
“derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all  
material mentioning or referencing the derived work. RSA Data Security, Inc.  
makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software  
or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided “as is”  
without express or implied warranty of any kind. These notices must be retained  
in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.  
E) Copyright © 2004 Magnus Damm <[email protected]>  
All rights reserved.  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of  
this software and associated documentation files (the ‘Software’), to deal in the  
software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,  
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the  
software, and to permit persons to whom the software is furnished to do so,  
subject to the following conditions:  
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all  
copies or substantial portions of the software.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND  
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN  
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN  
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE  
SOFTWARE.  
F) Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
3rd-Party IP Phone configuration library.  
Copyright © 2006 Centrepoint Technologies, Inc.  
This library is free software. You can redistribute it and/or modify it under the  
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software  
Foundation, either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later  
version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but  
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of  
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser  
General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the  
GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library. If not, write to the  
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,  
MA 02111-1307 USA.  
A P P E N D I X  
G
2 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X H  
APPENDIX H: HOME/OFFICE WIRING GUIDE  
HOME/OFFICE WIRING GUIDE  
Basic residential phone wiring  
Looped wiring  
Loop wiring is common in most residential houses. The demarcation point  
(see page 2) breaks the incoming phone lines into ‘loops’ that can run the  
length of the entire house, but are often broken into smaller loops that  
serve different areas of the house.  
All houses have at least one phone line, however it is also common to have  
two or more incoming phone lines. Whether you are wiring single, dual or  
multiple lines, you will still be using phone cord with four wires. How each  
phone jack is wired to the loops will determine if the phone jack is on  
Line 1 or Line 2.  
This document describes single- and dual-line wiring configurations. Many  
of the processes can also be applied to multi-line wiring.  
Residential Building  
Loop 2  
Incoming  
telephone lines  
Phone jack  
Demarcation point  
Loop 1  
A P P E N D I X  
H
2 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Depending on how the jack is wired, the phone can be plugged into Line 1,  
Line 2, or both.  
Single-line wiring  
For a single incoming phone line, all  
phones in the building will usually be  
wired using the RED and GREEN wires of  
the phone cord. The other two wires,  
BLACK and YELLOW, are not used.  
The demarcation point connects the  
incoming RED and GREEN pair to various  
loops within the building. It is probable  
that the building is also wired with a  
BLACK and YELLOW pair, however these  
are not connected to any wall jacks.  
Dual-line wiring  
Two incoming phone lines are denoted in  
pairs, usually the RED and GREEN are used  
as Line 1, and the BLACK and YELLOW are  
Line 2. All four wires are looped  
throughout the building so that each jack  
has access to Line 1 and Line 2. How each  
jack is connected to the RED, GREEN,  
BLACK, and YELLOW wires determines if it  
is connected to Line 1, Line 2, or both.  
Demarcation Point  
The demarcation point is the point of  
interconnection between the telephone  
company facilities and your building.  
Location: It is usually a box located inside  
the building, within 15 feet of the  
incoming phone wiring. In newer houses,  
it may be located near the fuse box.  
Wiring: The box will contain at least four  
posts used to branch the incoming wiring  
to the internal phone wiring. The RED  
post should have all the RED wires  
attached to it, the GREEN should have all  
the GREEN wires attached etc.  
This demarcation point shows two lines (four wires) wired as two loops.  
2 1 4  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home and home office wiring options prior to adding TalkSwitch  
Incoming phone lines  
D
Residential building  
All phones are connected together in a single loop (or in multiple loops)  
The phones are all wired to Line 1. If you have two or more incoming lines,  
the phones can be wired to Line 1, Line 2 or even both lines for dual line  
phones.  
Prior to adding a TalkSwitch, all phones in the home ring in unison when a  
call comes in. Home phones do not have TalkSwitch functionality and rely  
on phone company features for any enhancements.  
Choose a wiring method (Option 1 or Option 2 below) that best suits your  
needs.  
OPTION 1 — TalkSwitch phones separate from home phones  
Advantages  
Easy to set up. May not require any wiring changes when used with one  
incoming line.  
You can still use some of TalkSwitch’s features from the home phones.  
Disadvantages  
Your home phones and office phones are not fully integrated together.  
For example, calls to the office cannot be forwarded to the home phones.  
Home phones don’t have access to voicemail and other TalkSwitch  
features.  
All phones ring at the same time for incoming calls.  
LEGEND:  
D
E
A P P E N D I X  
H
2 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to phone lines  
Using one phone line  
Using two phone lines  
single-line phone cord — 2 pins  
single-line phone cords — 2 pins  
wall jack to  
TalkSwitch L1/L2 and L2  
wall jack to  
TalkSwitch L1/L2  
Using a dual-line phone jack  
dual-line phone cord — 4 pins  
wall jack to  
TalkSwitch L1/L2  
Connecting to TalkSwitch rear panel  
If you have two single lines, you will need to connect to jack L1/L2 and jack L2.  
E5  
E1  
E6  
E2  
E7  
E3  
E8  
E4  
L3/L4  
L1/L2  
L4  
L2  
LAN  
PF  
MUSIC PA  
USB  
SERIAL  
POWER  
This shows a single or a dual line  
from wall jack to TalkSwitch L1/L2  
To office extensions,  
phones and/or fax machines  
using single-line RJ-11 cabling  
LEGEND:  
D
E
2 1 6  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION 2 — TalkSwitch controls incoming lines and phones  
Advantages  
Home phone system and office phone system are integrated together.  
Calls to the home can be forwarded to the office and vice versa.  
The home phones have all the call handling capability as the office  
phones including voicemail, call cascade, mode scheduling, call  
forwarding etc.  
Suitable for one or two incoming phones lines.  
Disadvantages  
Requires a little more wiring, and additional cabling.  
Re-wiring demarcation point  
To house loops  
Incoming phone lines from  
telephone company  
To TalkSwitch incoming line  
1. Remove the wiring to the house loops.  
2. Disconnect any additional house loops that may also be connected. Only  
one loop wiring is shown for clarity.  
3. Tighten the screws connecting the incoming wires to their respective  
posts.  
Use an RJ-11 (single line or dual line) to connect to the TalkSwitch. Plug  
the RJ-11 into jack L1/L2.  
A P P E N D I X  
H
2 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding extension block  
D
E
X
114  
114  
114  
To TalkSwitch  
extension  
111  
112  
113  
X
Y
Z
To house loops  
1. Add an extension block next to the previous demarcation point.  
2. Take the previous house loop wiring and connect them to the four posts  
of the extension block.  
3. Use an RJ-11 (single line) to connect from the TalkSwitch. Plug the  
RJ-11 into a TalkSwitch extension, jack E1 through E8.  
LEGEND:  
D
E
2 1 8  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to TalkSwitch  
D
E
114  
114  
114  
To extension block,  
use a single-line phone  
cable from jack E4  
111  
112  
113  
Connecting to TalkSwitch  
rear panel  
From demarcation point,  
use a dual-line phone cable from  
the demarcation point to jack L1/L2  
E5  
E1  
E6  
E2  
E7  
E3  
E8  
E4  
L3/L4  
L1/L2  
L4  
L2  
LAN  
PF  
MUSIC PA  
USB  
SERIAL  
POWER  
Ext 113: To fax machine (optional) from jack E3  
Ext 112: To phone from jack E2  
Ext 111: To phone from jack E1  
To office extensions,  
phones and fax machines  
RJ-11 cabling can go up to 100 feet from the TalkSwitch without affecting voice quality.  
You may extend the lines farther although you may suffer voice quality.  
Cabling can be run along baseboards, moldings, threaded between walls, and hidden under carpets.  
Keep the cords in corners and along edges to help hide it, and avoid high traffic areas.  
LEGEND:  
D
E
A P P E N D I X  
H
2 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Use dual-line phone cable to connect from the demarcation point to  
TalkSwitch. You will need to purchase the dual-line phone cable  
(available at most hardware stores) or wire it and crimp it yourself. Do  
not use the supplied RJ-11 cable as it is only a single-line cable.  
2. Use the single-line RJ-11 phone cord supplied with TalkSwitch to connect  
from the TalkSwitch extension to the extension block.  
3. Connect the office phones to the TalkSwitch using RJ-11 cabling supplied  
with TalkSwitch or the cables supplied with your phone.  
2 2 0  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GLOSSARY  
Star/asterisk sign  
The character at the bottom left of your touchtone telephone number pad.  
*
#
Number/pound sign  
The character at the bottom right of your touchtone telephone number pad.  
3-way calling/conference call  
Connecting three parties together for one telephone conversation.  
TalkSwitch offers its own 3-way conference feature the same as the 3-way  
conference service offered by telephone companies.  
Analog (see also digital)  
Analog devices (phones, answering machines, etc.) transmit and receive  
sound in waves. The telephone lines in most homes are analog.  
Call back  
If call back is activated, it instructs TalkSwitch to call you back at a preset  
out-of-office telephone number. With call back you can access the  
TalkSwitch long-distance plan while you are away. TalkSwitch offers  
automatic call back and prompted call back.  
Call bridge (see DISA)  
Call forward  
Call forward is used to forward calls to one of the remote extensions.  
Caller ID  
A service provided by telephone companies, transmitting information about  
calls (caller’s name, telephone number, time of call, etc.).  
Call waiting  
A service provided by telephone companies, allowing you to accept a second  
G L O S S A R Y  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
incoming call on a telephone line that is already in use. Call waiting allows  
you to toggle from one caller to the other.  
Centrex/Plexar  
Central office exchange service. The telephone company offers PBX features on  
a ‘pay-per-service’ basis. This service may not be available from all telephone  
companies. Centrx/Plexar call switching happens at a local telephone  
company instead of your company’s premises.  
CNG  
A tone emitted by most fax machines to initiate contact with another  
fax machine.  
CO  
Central office of a telephone company.  
COM port  
Communications port. If you connect your TalkSwitch unit to your PC with a  
Serial cable, the COM port communicates with your TalkSwitch. It creates an  
internal virtual pathway to transmit data to and from the Serial port and the  
software. Most PCs have four COM ports.  
Communications software  
Software to send and receive data over telephone lines via modems.  
Compression  
Reduces the data size. It saves data storage space, bandwidth and  
transmission time.  
Conference call  
Connecting three or more parties for one phone conversation. They can be  
internal or external TalkSwitch parties or remote callers.  
Configuration  
The way the system is set up. The configuration software defines the settings  
of the TalkSwitch system. These settings determine what each TalkSwitch  
feature will do and when and how it will do it.  
Connector  
The end of a cable that plugs into a port or interface to connect one device  
to another.  
Digit  
A whole number from 0 to 9. The numbers on your telephone keypad  
are digits.  
Digital (see also analog)  
Digital devices (phones, answering machines, etc.) convert analog waves to  
2 2 2  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
digital signals for data storage or transmission over digital lines. The digital  
signal is converted back to analog waves that you can hear.  
DISA (call bridge)  
Direct Inward System Access. Allows you to make long-distance calls from  
anywhere in the world over your PBX using an access number and an  
authorization code.  
Distinctive ring  
A service provided by some telephone companies to distinguish two different  
telephone numbers using the same telephone line (i.e. fax machine).  
TalkSwitch can detect one, two and three ring bursts per ringing cycle to  
provide different handling for incoming calls.  
Driver  
The software that controls a device (printer, disk drive, modem, etc.). The  
driver acts as a translator between the device and the programs that  
use it.  
DTMF  
Dual-tone Multi-frequency. It is the system used by touchtone telephones.  
DTMF assigns a specific frequency (tone) to each key so that it can be  
identified by a microprocessor.  
Dual-line telephone  
A telephone allowing you to make and receive calls on two separate  
telephone lines.  
Extension  
See Local extension or Remote extension.  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission. The FCC is the federal regulatory  
agency for the United States, responsible for the regulation of interstate and  
international communications by radio, television, wire, satellite and cable.  
Firmware  
Firmware is a combination of software and hardware. Microchips that have  
data or programs recorded on them are called firmware.  
Flash button  
A button on your telephone. Pressing the Flash button has the same effect  
as pressing the Link button or pressing and releasing the hang-up hook on a  
telephone. All of these actions send a signal to TalkSwitch to put calls on/off  
hold.  
G L O S S A R Y  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Icon  
A small picture representing a program, an action or a feature in the  
configuration software. When you click on an icon, the program, action or  
feature is activated.  
IETF  
Internet Engineering Task Force. Develops and promotes Internet standards  
like TCP/IP and SIP protocols.  
Intercom  
A dedicated voice service within a specified user environment. TalkSwitch  
offers intercom capabilities between its local extensions.  
Interface  
Connects two separate entities. A user interface is the part of a program that  
you see on your computer screen and that connects you to the computer.  
IP address  
Internet Protocol. The standard protocol used by devices to communicate over  
a computer network. The IP address is a unique number or name that  
identifies the device.  
IP extension  
An extension that has its own IP address utilizing the Internet protocol in  
connection with VoIP.  
IP phone  
See IP extension.  
ISDN  
Integrated Services Digital Network.  
ISP  
Internet Service Provider. Facilitates access to the Internet for end-users. Most  
ISPs are telephone companies. Their services include domain name  
registration, web hosting, leased line access, etc.  
Keypad  
The push buttons on a telephone.  
Keypad commands  
Combinations of digits used to configure TalkSwitch from a touchtone  
telephone.  
LED  
Light Emitting Diode. An device that lights up when electricity is passed  
through. TalkSwitch has five LEDs on its front panel letting you know which  
lines are in use and three on the back panel beside the LAN port.  
2 2 4  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line 1, 2, 3, or 4  
A jack or plug-in on the back panel of TalkSwitch which can accept an RJ-11  
plug from a telephone line or PBX system. You can plug in a single-line  
telephone cable into this jack and it becomes a usable TalkSwitch line.  
Link button  
The Link button has the same effect as the Flash button or pressing and  
releasing the hang-up hook on most telephones. On some telephones, the  
function of the Link button is internal to the telephone and pressing it has  
no effect on TalkSwitch.  
Local extension  
A local extension is any telephone or analog device (answering machine, fax,  
etc.) plugged into one of the extension jacks on the back panel of your  
TalkSwitch.  
Modem  
Acronym for MODulator-DEModulator. A modem is a device that converts  
digital information from a computer into analog signals for transmission  
over telephone lines and vice-versa.  
Modes  
TalkSwitch supports different time and day modes of operation, providing  
different call management depending on the current mode of operation.  
Monitor (TalkSwitch monitor)  
A feature included with the configuration software. The monitor provides a  
graphical representation of telephone traffic as it flows through the system.  
Network  
A group of two or more computer systems linked together.  
PBX  
Private Branch eXchange. A PBX is a private telephone network used within  
an enterprise. The PBX controls access to telephone lines and services. It  
allows many users to share a smaller number of telephone lines using  
extensions and have access to additional call handling benefits (call hold,  
intercom calling, etc.). TalkSwitch is a small PBX.  
Phone load  
see Ringing equivalency.  
POP3  
The post office protocol (POP) is a standard Internet protocol for retrieving  
e-mail from a remote server. Most subscribers to an Internet service provider  
have e-mail accounts using POP3 (3 is the version number).  
G L O S S A R Y  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prompt  
Recorded instructions played to a caller by TalkSwitch. Prompts are also used  
to provide instructions when you configure TalkSwitch using a telephone  
keypad.  
PSTN  
Public Switched Telephone Network. Your incoming phone line is on a PSTN.  
Registered jacks  
Telephone and data plugs registered with the FCC.  
Remote extension  
A call forwarding number that can be a telephone number in any location,  
set up as a virtual extension of the TalkSwitch unit. The remote extension is  
assigned an extension number and has a voice mailbox.  
REN  
Ringer Equivalency Number. A number determined in accordance with the US  
code of federal regulations. It represents the ringer loading effect on a line.  
RJ-11  
Registered jack 11 is used to connect single dual-wire telephone lines. It is  
used with telephones, cordless phones, fax machines and modems.  
RJ-14  
Registered jack 14 usually connects dual-line telephone devices and supports  
four conductors.  
RJ-45  
Registered jack 45 supports eight conductors and is generally used for  
networking applications.  
RTP  
Real-time Transport Protocol. It defines a format for delivering audio and  
video files over the Internet.  
Routing  
Determining the path that a message or call has to take over circuits.  
TalkSwitch routes incoming calls according to the configuration.  
Serial communication  
A type of electronic communication requiring data bits to be sent one after  
the other, unlike parallel communication. Modems rely on serial  
communication to send data over telephone lines.  
Shortcut key  
A key combination that causes a specific command to be executed. Shortcut  
keys combine the Ctrl or Alt keys with other keys. (e.g. Ctrl and C is the  
shortcut key to copy selected items).  
2 2 6  
T A L K S W I T C H USER GUIDE • NORTH AMERICA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIP  
Session Initiation Protocol. A signaling protocol, developed by the Internet  
engineering task force (IETF).  
SIP server  
A server using the SIP protocol to manage calls between SIP devices.  
Serial port  
Serial ports are physical plug-ins. They allow two devices to exchange data.  
SMTP  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The standard for e-mail transmission across the  
Internet. SMTP is a text-based protocol.  
Terminal adapter  
A device that allows analog devices to be used on digital lines (ISDN).  
Terminal adapters are similar to modems.  
TX/RX  
Transmit and receive data.  
UDP  
User Datagram Protocol. An Internet protocol which allows applications on a  
computer network to exchange short messages (datagrams).  
UPnP  
Universal Plug and Play. Allows networked devices to connect seamlessly in  
home and corporate environments using Internet-based communication  
standards.  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus. USB connection supports more bandwidth than a Serial  
or parallel connection.  
Virtual  
The term ‘virtual’ refers to something that is not physically plugged in.  
Voicemail (call answer)  
A service provided by TalkSwitch or telephone companies giving callers the  
opportunity to leave a message when your phone is busy or unanswered.  
VoIP  
Voice over IP. Sending voice over an Internet connection.  
VPN  
Virtual Private Network. A communication network used within a company or  
organization to communicate over a public network. VPN message traffic is  
carried on Internet infrastructure using standard protocols.  
G L O S S A R Y  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
to remote extension (music on  
A
Administration  
Announcements  
Call handling  
Call queue  
Call routing  
C
auto attendant routing  
I N D E X  
2 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call transfer  
F
Caller ID  
Fax machine  
H
Hardware unit  
call routing/transfer/  
Hunt group access  
I
Incoming lines  
D
Direct line access  
Distinctive ring  
E
Extension ring groups  
Extensions  
using phones connected in  
Intercom  
2 3 0  
T A L K S W I T C H U S E R G U I D E • N O R T H A M E R I C A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L
T
Telephones  
to a local or remote  
Local extensions  
U
V
M
Modem  
N
Notification options  
R
I N D E X  
2 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Home Theater System DT 200 User Manual
Sonance Network Card VE1 User Manual
Sony Cell Phone ST23a User Manual
Sony Computer Monitor GDM W900 User Manual
Sony Graphics Tablet SGP321 User Manual
Sony Universal Remote RM LJ312 User Manual
SoundCraft Music Mixer D Mix 500 User Manual
Stanley Black Decker Water Pump SM50 User Manual
Sylvania Flat Panel Television LC370SS8 User Manual
Symbol Technologies Network Card CXP854P60 User Manual